SlideShare une entreprise Scribd logo
1  sur  78
Télécharger pour lire hors ligne
‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬

‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ : ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﻻﻟﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺗـﺎ ﺁﻳﻨـﺪﻩ ﺑـﻪ ﻃـﻮﺭ‬

                                                                                        ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ.‬

‫ﻃﺮﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ : ﺍﮔﺮ ) ﺗﺎ + ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ) ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ + ﺍﺳﺖ ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬

                           ‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ. ﻃﺒﻖ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ :‬

     ‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬     ‫)‪(by‬ﺗﺎ+ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ+ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ + )‪ (For‬ﺍﺳﺖ + ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬




‫ﻃﺮﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ : ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬

                                                                                                      ‫ﻛﺮﺩ .‬

‫ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ + ‪ + by‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ + ‪Subject + will have been + verb + ing+ for‬‬



                                                   ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ: ﺗﺎ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ 8 ﺩﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ .‬

‫.‪We will have been studying for two hours by eight o’clock‬‬


                                           ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ: ﺗﺎ ﻣﺎﻩ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ 01 ﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻬﺮﺍﻥ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ .‬

‫.‪We will have been living in tehran for ten years by next month‬‬


                  ‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.‬     ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ : ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻬﺪﻩ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ‪Will‬‬




                                                                     ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ : ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﺴﺖ ﺍﺯ :‬

                                         ‫ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ + ‪By‬‬




                                                 ‫801‬
‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬

‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ : ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻻﻟﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻭ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳـﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬

                                                                                      ‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.‬




‫ﻃﺮﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ : ﺍﮔﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ" ﺑﻮﺩ" ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ‬

                                                             ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ.‬

        ‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬           ‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ + ) ‪ ( For‬ﺑﻮﺩ + ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬



‫ﻃﺮﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ : ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑـﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴـﻲ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣـﻮﻝ ﺯﻳـﺮ‬

                                                                                          ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ.‬

‫ﻓﺎﻋﻞ+ ‪ + before/when‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ + ‪Subject + had been + verb + ing + for‬‬

                                                                                    ‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ +‬




                                                                                                   ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ:‬

                                        ‫1- ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺍﻭﻣﺪﻱ ﻧﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻢ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﺩﻡ.‬

‫.‪I had been teaching for half an hour when you came‬‬
                                   ‫2- ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺰﻧﻲ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻢ ﺁﺷﭙﺰﻱ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ.‬

‫.‪I had been doing the cooking for two hours before you called‬‬



                ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ : ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻬﺪﻩ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ‪ had‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ.‬

                             ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ : ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ‪ before, when‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.‬




                                                ‫901‬
talkative :      ‫ﭘﺮ ﺣﺮﻑ‬                           crowded :      ‫ﺷﻠﻮﻍ‬

intelligent :    ‫ﺑﺎ ﻫﻮﺵ‬                           taciturn :   ‫ﻛﻢ ﺣﺮﻑ‬

ugly :            ‫ﺯﺷﺖ‬                             rich :       ‫ﺛﺮﻭﺗﻤﻨﺪ‬

considerable :            ‫ﭼﺸﻤﮕﻴﺮ – ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ‬




                                            110
‫‪adjective‬‬       ‫ﺻﻔﺖ‬

‫ﺻﻔﺖ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻒ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ‬
       ‫ﹰ‬                             ‫ﹰ‬

                                                                              ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ. ﻣﺜﻼ :‬
                                                                                ‫ﹰ‬

‫. ‪careful student‬‬                      ‫ﺩﺍﻧﺶ ﺁﻣﻮﺯ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‬

                              ‫ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ، ﻣﺜﻼ‬
                              ‫ﹰ‬

‫.‪my new green book‬‬                    ‫ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺳﺒﺰ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﻡ‬




         ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ : ﺍﮔﺮ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﺑﻄﻲ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ.‬

‫ﺻﻔﺖ + ‪ + to be‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬

‫ﺻﻔﺖ + ‪ + to get‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬

‫ﺻﻔﺖ + ‪ + to turn‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬

‫ﺻﻔﺖ + ‪ + to become‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬

‫ﺻﻔﺖ + ‪ + to grow‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬

‫ﺻﻔﺖ + ‪ + to make‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ) ﺑﻮﺩﻥ – ﺷﺪﻥ – ﮔﺸﺘﻦ – ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻥ ( ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺟﻨﺒﺔ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺑـﻂ ﺩﺍﺭﻧـﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ‪link‬‬

                                         ‫‪ verb‬ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺭﺑﻂ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ :‬

‫. ‪My father grew angry‬‬
‫‪In spring the leaves turn green‬‬                  ‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﻬﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﮔﻬﺎ ﺳﺒﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ.‬

‫. ‪Today the weather got cold‬‬                             ‫ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺷﺪ.‬




                          ‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ : ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﺑﻄﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ) ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ. ( .‬


‫‪Seem / Appear/ Look/ Sound/ Taste / Smell / Feel‬‬                    ‫ﺻﻔﺖ +‬




                                                  ‫111‬
‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ : ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﺑﻄﻲ ﻫﻴﭽﮕﺎﻩ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺜﻼ:‬
                                 ‫ﹰ‬

‫.‪he looks( angrily ) angry‬‬                                               ‫ﺍﻭ ﻋﺼﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺭﺳﺪ .‬

‫.‪the soup tastes ( unusually ) unusual‬‬                             ‫ﺳﻮﭖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺭﺳﺪ.‬




‫ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺍﺷـﺎﺭﻩ ‪ this, that‬ﺑـﺎ ﺍﺳـﻢ ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺧـﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻔـﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺟﻤـﻊ‬

                                                                                          ‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ.‬

                                                                                                     ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ:‬

‫‪This book‬‬          ‫. ‪These books‬‬
‫‪That book‬‬          ‫. ‪Those books‬‬



                           ‫ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ : ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺳﻪ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ . ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺯﻳﺮ :‬

                           ‫1- ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ : ﺩﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮﻣﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻨﺪ ﻣﺜﻼ :‬
                             ‫ﹰ‬

‫.‪Helen is as tall as Susan‬‬                                  ‫ﻫﻠﻦ ﻫﻢ ﻗﺪ ﺳﻮﺯﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ .‬

                                                            ‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺍﺳﺖ :‬

                                      ‫‪as‬‬      ‫ﺻﻔﺖ‬         ‫‪as‬‬

                                   ‫‪not so‬‬        ‫ﺻﻔﺖ‬        ‫‪as‬‬



‫.‪Hellen is as tall as Susan‬‬
‫.‪Hellen is not so tall as Susan‬‬




            ‫2-ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﺮﺗﺮ ﻳﺎ ) ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ ( : ﺩﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺪﺗﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ.‬

                                                                  ‫ﻣﺜﻼ : ﻋﻠﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻬﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻗﺪﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ .‬
                                                                                                 ‫ﹰ‬




                                                 ‫211‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ )‪ ( than‬ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﺗﺮ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺷـﺎﻥ‬

                                                                               ‫‪ er‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺜﻼ:‬
                                                                                ‫ﹰ‬

‫.‪Hellen is taller than Susan‬‬
                       ‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺻﻔﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺳﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻗﺒﻠﺸﺎﻥ ) ‪ ( more‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.‬

‫. ‪My book is more interesting than yours‬‬                                                       ‫ﻣﺜﻼ :‬
                                                                                                 ‫ﹰ‬

                                                     ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺻﻔﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺑﻌﺪﹰﺍ ﺗﺒﺼﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ.‬




‫3- ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﺮﺗﺮﻳﻦ : ﭼﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺗﺮﻳﻦ‬

                                     ‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﺜﻼ : ﻫﻠﻦ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻗﺪﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺩﺍﻧﺶ ﺁﻣﻮﺯ ﻛﻼﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ .‬
                                                                           ‫ﹰ‬

‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ the‬ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻭ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺮﺟﻤـﻪ‬

                 ‫ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ )ﺗﺮﻳﻦ( ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺷﺎﻥ ‪ est‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺜﻼ:‬
                  ‫ﹰ‬

‫. ‪Hellen is the tallest student in the class‬‬
                           ‫ﻭﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺻﻔﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺳﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻗﺒﻠﺸﺎﻥ ‪ most‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺜﻼ‬
                           ‫ﹰ‬

‫.‪My book is the most interesting book in the library‬‬



  ‫ﺗﺒﺼﺮﻩ : ﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺁﻧﻬﺎﻳﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ‪ y‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ ‪er‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ‪ est‬ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ .‬

‫‪happy → happier than → the happiest‬‬
‫‪busy → busier than → the busiest‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺷﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ‪ y‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ ‪ more‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ‪ most‬ﻗﺒﻠﺸﺎﻥ ﺍﺿـﺎﻓﻪ ﻣـﻲ‬

                                                                                                ‫ﺷﻮﺩ.‬

‫‪Active / more active than / the most active‬‬
‫‪Comic / more comic than / the most comic‬‬


‫ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ :ﭼﻨﺪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎ ﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ‬

                                                                         ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ.‬




                                                  ‫311‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻖ‬                  ‫ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ‬              ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬

        good – well             better than          the best

          bad - ill             worse than          the worst


           much
           many                 More than           the most


           Little               Less than           the least

      ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻋﻀﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﻩ‬   elder ------       the eldest
old
        ‫ﻓﺮﺩ – ﺷﺨﺺ‬          older than         the oldest
            ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬          Farther than        the farthest
far
            ‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬          Further than       the furthest




                                    114
‫‪The same as‬‬
‫‪ : same‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮕﻲ ﻭ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ the‬ﺑـﻪ ﻛـﺎﺭ ﻣـﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻌﻨـﻲ )‬

                                                                        ‫ﻫﻤﺎﻥ – ﻳﻚ ( ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﺜﻼ :‬
                                                                          ‫ﹰ‬

‫.‪Hellen and Jane live in the same street‬‬
                                                          ‫ﻫﻠﻦ ﻭ ﺟﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ .‬




‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﮔﺮﺍﻣﺮﻱ : ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻬﺎﻱ ﮔﺮﺍﻣﺮﻱ ﺻﻔﺎﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺷﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ) ‪ ( er , re , le , ow‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ‬

‫ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺻﻔﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺷﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ‪ y‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ‪ er‬ﻭ ‪ est‬ﻣـﻲ ﺩﻫـﺪ. ﺍﻣـﺎ ﻫﻤـﺎﻥ‬

‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻬﺎﻱ ﮔﺮﺍﻣﺮﻱ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺫﻛﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺎﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ‪ most , more‬ﻫـﻢ ﺗﻔﻀـﻴﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻋـﺎﻟﻲ‬

                                                                                               ‫ﻛﺮﺩ.‬




                                  ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻖ‬                     ‫ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ‬                       ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬

                  ‫‪narrow‬‬                     ‫‪more narrow than‬‬                   ‫‪the most narrow‬‬
                  ‫‪narrow‬‬                      ‫‪narrower than‬‬                     ‫‪the narrowest‬‬
                  ‫‪simple‬‬                      ‫‪more simple than‬‬                  ‫‪the most simple‬‬
                  ‫‪simple‬‬                        ‫‪simpler than‬‬                    ‫‪the simplest‬‬
                   ‫‪clever‬‬                      ‫‪more clever than‬‬                 ‫‪the most clever‬‬
                   ‫‪clever‬‬                      ‫‪cleverer than‬‬                    ‫‪the cleverest‬‬
                   ‫‪obscure‬‬                   ‫‪more obscure than‬‬                  ‫‪the most obscure‬‬
                  ‫‪obscure‬‬                      ‫‪obscurer than‬‬                      ‫‪the obscurest‬‬



                                                                      ‫ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻣﻼﻳﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺖ :‬

‫1- ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺷﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ‪ y‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ happy‬ﻫﻨﮕـﺎﻡ ﺍﺿـﺎﻓﻪ ﺷـﺪﻥ ‪ er,est‬ﺣـﺮﻑ ‪y‬‬

                                                                          ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ‪ i‬ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.‬

‫‪happy → happier than → the happiest‬‬




                                                 ‫511‬
‫2-ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺷﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ‪ e‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ wide‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ‪ st , r‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣـﻲ‬

                                                                                           ‫ﺷﻮﺩ.‬

‫‪Wide‬‬         ‫‪wider than‬‬          ‫‪the widest‬‬
‫3- ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺘﻬﺎﻳﻴﻜﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺁﺧﺮﺷﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﻲ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺍﻧﻜـﻪ ﻗﺒـﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑـﻲ‬

‫ﺻﺪﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﻚ ﺻﺪﺍﺩﺍﺭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ big‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪﻫﺎﻱ ‪ er‬ﻭ ‪ est‬ﺣـﺮﻑ ﺑـﻲ ﺻـﺪﺍﻱ‬

                                                                              ‫ﺁﺧﺮ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.‬

‫‪Big‬‬         ‫‪bigger than‬‬         ‫‪the biggest‬‬




‫‪crowded‬‬                             ‫ﺷﻠﻮﻍ‬           ‫‪a pair of shoes‬‬            ‫ﻳﻚ ﺟﻔﺖ ﻛﻔﺶ‬

‫‪busy‬‬                       ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﺎﺭ – ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ‬          ‫‪trousers‬‬                            ‫ﺷﻠﻮﺍﺭ‬

‫‪noisy‬‬                         ‫ﭘﺮ ﺳﺮﻭ ﺻﺪﺍ‬           ‫‪scissors‬‬                            ‫ﻗﻴﭽﻲ‬

‫‪glass‬‬                               ‫ﻋﻴﻨﻚ‬           ‫‪ball point pen‬‬                    ‫ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‬

‫‪cane‬‬                    ‫ﻧﯽ - ﻗﻠﻢ ﺧﻮﺷﻨﻮﻳﺴﻲ‬          ‫‪fountain pen‬‬                    ‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﻮﻳﺲ‬




                                                                             ‫ﺑﻘﻴﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ‪: the same‬‬

‫) ﻣﺜﻞ – ﺷﺒﻴﻪ – ﻣﺎﻧﻨـﺪ‬       ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪ the same‬ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ as‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪ the same as‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ‬

                                                                    ‫( ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﺩﻑ ﺑﺎ ‪ like‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜﻼ :‬
                                                                      ‫ﹰ‬

‫.‪Your shoes are the same as mine‬‬



                                                ‫611‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪ the same‬ﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ as‬ﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.‬

                                  ‫‪ + as‬ﺍﺳﻢ + ‪the same‬‬



‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮕﻲ ﺩﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﻧﺴـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﭼـﻮﻥ ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪the‬‬

         ‫‪ same‬ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ ﻧﺎﮔﺰﻳﺮ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ :‬

‫.‪Hellen is as old as Susan‬‬
‫.‪Hellen is the same age as Susan‬‬




                                          ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﻢ .‬

‫- ‪tall‬‬    ‫‪big‬‬                      ‫ﺑﺰﺭﮒ‬               ‫‪size‬‬                                ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬

‫‪long‬‬                                 ‫ﺩﺭﺍﺯ‬             ‫‪length‬‬                              ‫ﺩﺭﺍﺯﺍ‬

‫‪wide‬‬                                ‫ﭘﻬﻦ‬               ‫‪width‬‬                                 ‫ﭘﻬﻨﺎ‬

‫‪deep‬‬                                ‫ﻋﻤﻴﻖ‬              ‫‪depth‬‬                               ‫ﻋﻤﻖ‬

‫‪old‬‬                            ‫ﻣﺴﻦ – ﭘﻴﺮ‬              ‫‪age‬‬                                   ‫ﺳﻦ‬

‫‪high‬‬                         ‫ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ – ﺑﻠﻨﺪ‬             ‫‪height‬‬                              ‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬




                                                  ‫711‬
‫‪adverb‬‬    ‫ﻗﻴﺪ‬

‫ﻗﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ‪ ly‬ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻴـﺪ ﻣـﻲ‬

                                                                                             ‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪ. ﻣﺜﻼ :‬
                                                                                               ‫ﹰ‬

                    ‫‪sincere‬‬        ‫ﻣﺨﻠﺺ‬                                 ‫‪sincerely‬‬        ‫ﻣﺨﻠﺼﺎﻧﻪ‬

                         ‫‪quick‬‬       ‫ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬                                ‫‪quickly‬‬         ‫ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬

                         ‫‪careful‬‬       ‫ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‬                             ‫‪carefully‬‬          ‫ﺑﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ‬




‫ﺍﻳﻨﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻗﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺟﺎﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ‬

                                                                                    ‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﻣﺜﻼ :‬
                                                                                      ‫ﹰ‬

‫. ‪Hellen speak slowly‬‬
‫. ‪Hellen apeaks English slowly‬‬



     ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﺎﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.‬

                                                                                                 ‫ﻣﺜﻼً :‬

‫. ‪He left the room quickly‬‬



                                                   ‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻳﺮ ‪ ly‬ﻧﻤﻲ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪ ly‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ.‬

           ‫‪Fast‬‬                      ‫‪Hard‬‬                      ‫‪Short‬‬                      ‫‪Long‬‬
           ‫‪Little‬‬                    ‫‪Much‬‬                      ‫‪Late‬‬                       ‫‪Early‬‬
           ‫‪Near‬‬                       ‫‪Far‬‬                       ‫‪Still‬‬                     ‫‪Just‬‬
         ‫‪Enough‬‬                    ‫‪Straight‬‬                    ‫‪Soon‬‬                       ‫‪Low‬‬




                                                ‫811‬
‫‪a nap‬‬                             ‫ﭼﺮﺕ ﺯﺩﻥ‬

                                  ‫‪a shower‬‬                        ‫ﺩﻭﺵ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬

                                  ‫‪a test-exam‬‬                    ‫ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ‬

              ‫‪Take‬‬                ‫‪a bath‬‬                          ‫ﺣﻤﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬

                                  ‫‪a dictation‬‬                     ‫ﺩﻳﻜﺘﻪ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ‬

                                  ‫‪a trip‬‬                            ‫ﺳﻔﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬

                                  ‫‪a vehicle‬‬                ‫ﺳﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪﺍﻱ ﺷﺪﻥ‬




                                                                          ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ :‬

                                                                ‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ.‬


                                                   ‫1- ﻫﻠﻦ ﻣﺜﻞ ﭘﺪﺭﺵ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻬﺮﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ .‬

‫. ‪Hellen doesn’t behave the same kind as her father‬‬
                                             ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﺗﻮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺑﺪﻫﻢ.‬

                                            ‫3- ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ ﻣﺎﻝ ﺗﻮ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ.‬

                                                 ‫4- ﺍﻭ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺸﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ.‬

‫.‪He types the letters faster than my secretery‬‬



                                           ‫911‬
‫5- ﻣﻦ ﻫﻴﭽﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﺮﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﻢ ﺑﻴﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﻡ.‬

‫. ‪I never get up later than my parents‬‬
                                                 ‫6- ﺍﻭ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ.‬

                               ‫7- ﻓﻜﺮ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﻥ ﺟﺪﻱ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﻜﺎﺭﺵ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ.‬

                                              ‫8- ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﮔﻴﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻳﺪ.‬

                                                ‫9- ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺸﻮﺭ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ.‬

                                                  ‫01- ﺍﻭ ﺻﻤﻴﻤﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺶ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ.‬

‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ . ﻃﺒﻌﺎ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳـﻢ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﻳـﺎ ﺑـﻪ‬
                               ‫ﹰ‬

                                                          ‫ﺗﻨﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺑﻄﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ :‬

‫.‪Hellen is a fast typist‬‬
‫.‪Hellen is fast‬‬
                                ‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻣﺜﻼ :‬
                                  ‫ﹰ‬

‫.‪Hellen types fast‬‬
                ‫ﻗﻴﺪ‬

‫.‪Hellen looks fast‬‬
      ‫ﺻﻔﺖ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺑﻂ‬

                                                ‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ‪ ly‬ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ :‬

                ‫‪friendly‬‬                      ‫ﺻﻤﻴﻤﻲ‬                      ‫‪lovely‬‬                ‫ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﻲ‬

                ‫‪deadly‬‬                          ‫ﻣﺮﮔﺒﺎﺭ‬                 ‫‪kingly‬‬                         ‫ﺷﺎﻫﺎﻧﻪ‬

                  ‫‪likely‬‬                      ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ‬                  ‫‪worldy‬‬                         ‫ﺟﻬﺎﻧﻲ‬

                   ‫‪motherly‬‬                     ‫ﻣﺎﺩﺭﺍﻧﻪ‬                ‫‪fatherly‬‬                        ‫ﭘﺪﺭﺍﻧﻪ‬

                  ‫‪sily‬‬                         ‫ﺍﺣﻤﻘﺎﻧﻪ‬                 ‫‪ugly‬‬                            ‫ﺯﺷﺖ‬

                         ‫‪sisterly‬‬            ‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺮﺍﻧﻪ‬



‫.‪Hellen is a friendly girl‬‬


                                                   ‫021‬
‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ : ﺍﮔﺮ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ‪ ly‬ﺍﺿـﺎﻓﻪ ﻛـﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻣـﺜﻼ‬
‫ﹰ‬

                           ‫ﮔﻔﺖ ‪ friendlyLY‬ﻧﺎﮔﺰﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.‬




                                         ‫‪Fashion‬‬
   ‫………… + ‪In a/ an‬‬                           ‫‪Way‬‬                                                 ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ‬

                                         ‫‪Manner‬‬


                                                                          ‫ﻫﻠﻦ ﺻﻤﻴﻤﺎﻧﻪ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ.‬

‫.‪Hellen speaks in a friendly manner‬‬


         ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻗﻴﺪ : ﻗﻴﺪ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺳﻪ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺗﺮ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺡ :‬

‫1- ﻗﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ : ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﺜﻼ ﻫﻠﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻨﺪﻱ ﺳـﻮﺯﺍﻥ ﺗﺎﻳـﭗ ﻣـﻲ‬
                             ‫ﹰ‬

                                                                                             ‫ﻛﻨﺪ .‬

                                                            ‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ.‬

                                        ‫‪as‬‬        ‫ﻗﻴﺪ‬      ‫‪as‬‬

                                ‫‪not as/not so‬‬             ‫ﻗﻴﺪ‬      ‫‪as‬‬


‫.‪Hellen types as slowly as Susan‬‬
‫.‪Hellen doesn’t type so/as slowly as Susan‬‬




                           ‫2- ﻗﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺗﺮ : ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺪﺗﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺪ ﻣﺜﻼ :‬
                             ‫ﹰ‬

                                                                     ‫ﻫﻠﻦ ﻛﻨﺪﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﺯﺍﻥ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ.‬




                                                  ‫121‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﺮﺗﺮ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﻭ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﻭ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺗﺮ ﺍﻳﻨﻄﻮﺭ‬

‫ﻧﻴﺴﺖ. ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ ly‬ﻣﻲ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ‪ more than‬ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ly‬‬

                                                   ‫ﻧﻤﻲ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺵ ‪ er‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ، ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ:‬

‫.‪Hellen drives more slowly than Susan‬‬
‫.‪Hellen drives faster than Susan‬‬



‫3- ﻗﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺗﺮﻳﻦ ) ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ( : ﭼﻨﺪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻬﺘـﺮﻳﻦ ﻳـﺎ ﺑـﺪﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻣـﻲ‬

                                                         ‫ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺪ. ﻣﺜﻼ ﻫﻠﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻨﺪﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ.‬
                                                                                         ‫ﹰ‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ "ﺗﺮﻳﻦ" ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﺯﻗﻴﺪ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﻴﺪ ‪ ly‬ﻣﻲ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ ﻗﺒﻠﺶ ‪ the most‬ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ly‬‬

                                              ‫ﻧﻤﻲ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺵ ‪ the est‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ، ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ :‬

‫.‪Hellen types the most slowly‬‬
‫.‪Hellen types the fastest‬‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺫﻛﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ “ﺗﺮﻳﻦ” ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻧﺎﮔﺰﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻋـﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴـﻲ ﺑـﻪ‬

                                                                  ‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ :‬

                       ‫} ﻭﺟﻪ / ﺻﻮﺭﺕ / ﺷﻜﻞ {‬                ‫ﺗﺮﻳﻦ‬      ‫ﺑﻪ ...........‬




                                                   ‫221‬
‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ : ‪intensifiers‬‬          ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﻤﻴﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬

‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻻﻟﺖ ﺑﺮ ﻛﻤﻴﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ much, many‬ﮐﻪ ﻫﺮﺩﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﯽ ﺯﻳـﺎﺩ – ﺧﻴﻠـﯽ‬

                                                                                        ‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ.‬

‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ + ‪much‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ + ‪many‬‬

‫ﻓﺮﻕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ much‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ many‬ﺍﺳـﻢ‬

                                                         ‫ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ.‬

                         ‫‪ much‬ﻭ ‪ many‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‬
                                                                         ‫ﹰ‬

‫?‪Has Hellen written many letters‬‬
‫?‪Does Hellen drink much coffee‬‬
‫.‪Helen has not written many letters‬‬
‫.‪Hellen doesn’t drink much coffee‬‬


‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺍﺯ ‪ a lot of‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷـﻮﺩ ﭼـﻪ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﻗﺎﺑـﻞ ﺷـﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﻭ ﭼـﻪ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﻏﻴـﺮ ﻗﺎﺑـﻞ‬
                                                                          ‫ﹰ‬

                                                                           ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ، ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ :‬

‫.‪Hellen has written a lot of letters‬‬
‫.‪Hellen drinks a lot of coffee‬‬


                         ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﺕ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ‪ too‬ﻳﺎ ‪ very‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ .‬




                                       ‫‪Too‬‬
                  ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩ – ﺧﻴﻠﯽ‬                         ‫ﺻﻔﺖ / ﻗﻴﺪ +‬
                                      ‫‪Very‬‬




                                                ‫321‬
: ‫ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜﻼ‬very ‫ : ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‬too & very ‫ﻓﺮﻕ‬
                  ‫ﹰ‬

The park is very beautiful.
The teacher speaks very fluently.
                                                : ‫ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﺎﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‬too ‫ﺍﻣﺎ‬

It is too cold today.
That driver drives too slowly.


                     :‫ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﻣﺜﻼ‬many ‫ ﻭ‬much ‫ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ‬too, very
                      ‫ﹰ‬

There were too many cars in the street.
Hellen drinks too much water in a day.
She knows very many words.
Thank you very much.




           .‫ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‬very , too ‫ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ، ﺑﺮﻋﻜﺲ‬enough ‫ﻛﻠﻤﻪ‬


                              ‫+ ﺻﻔﺖ / ﻗﻴﺪ‬                enough

You are rich enough .
He speaks fluently enough .


             : ‫ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺜﻼ‬enough ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ‬
               ‫ﹰ‬                            ‫ﹰ‬

They spend enough money in a month .




                                           : ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﻤﻴﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﻢ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ‬

                                      Little           ‫ﻣﻔﺮﺩ – ﺍﺳﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ‬
                   ‫ﻛﻢ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﻙ‬
                                                          ‫ﺟﻤﻊ – ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ‬
                                       Few



                                                 124
‫‪ : few & little‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﻤﻴﺘﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻧﻘﺪﺭ ﻧﺎﭼﻴﺰﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻭ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﺘﺮﻧﺪ.‬

   ‫.‪I have little money in my pocket‬‬
   ‫.‪He knows few words‬‬



   ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﭼﺸﻤﮕﻴﺮﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ few‬ﻭ ‪ little‬ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﻢ ﻗﺒـﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺣـﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳـﻒ )‪(a‬‬

                                                                                               ‫ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ.‬

                                         ‫‪a little‬‬          ‫ﻣﻔﺮﺩ – ﺍﺳﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ‬
                          ‫ﻳﮏ ﻛﻤﻲ‬
                                                              ‫ﺟﻤﻊ – ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ‬
                                            ‫‪a few‬‬




   ‫.‪I drink a little coffee after dinner‬‬
   ‫.‪He has a few books in his book case‬‬




              ‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﺓ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ.‬



                                                    ‫‪all‬‬
‫‪plenty of – a great deal of – a lot of‬‬                                 ‫‪a lot of – a large number of – plenty of‬‬

                            ‫‪most‬‬                                         ‫‪most‬‬

                    ‫‪much‬‬                                                         ‫‪many‬‬

                       ‫‪some‬‬         ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ‬          ‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ‬      ‫‪some‬‬

                  ‫-------‬                                                        ‫‪several‬‬

                        ‫‪a little‬‬                                         ‫‪a few‬‬

                                   ‫‪little‬‬                       ‫‪few‬‬

                                                     ‫‪no‬‬


                                                     ‫521‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﺎﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺳـﻢ ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺍﺯ‬

                                                           ‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ. ﻣﺜﻼ:‬
                                                            ‫ﹰ‬

‫.‪She Spends little money and I spend much‬‬
          ‫ﺻﻔﺖ‬                       ‫ﺿﻤﻴﺮ‬




                                                 ‫621‬
‫‪Such‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻏﻴﺮﻗﺎﺑـﻞ ﺷـﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﻣﻔـﺮﺩ ﺑـﺪﻳﻦ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ:‬

                                                       ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ.‬

‫.‪Helen hasn't said such words‬‬
‫.‪Helen doesn't like such weather‬‬


                    ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ Such a/an‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ:‬

‫.‪Such a child can't stay quiet‬‬


‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻪ ‪ Such‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺻﻔﺘﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ:‬


                               ‫ﺻﻔﺖ + ‪Such a/an‬‬            ‫ﺍﺳﻢ +‬

‫.‪I haven’t seen such an interesting film so far‬‬
  ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ‪ Such‬ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ‪ so‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ:‬


                                ‫ﺻﻔﺖ + ‪So‬‬        ‫ﺍﺳﻢ + ‪+ a an‬‬

‫.‪I haven't seen so interesting a film so far‬‬


‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺭﺍ ‪ Very‬ﺷﺪﺕ ﺑﺨﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﺟـﺎﻱ ﺣـﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳـﻒ ﺑـﺪﻳﻦ‬

                                                                                        ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ.‬


                                ‫ﺻﻔﺖ + ‪a + Very‬‬           ‫ﺍﺳﻢ +‬




                                               ‫721‬
‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ :‬

                                     ‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ.‬


                 ‫1ـ ﺍﻭ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻏﺬﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺷﻤﺰﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻧﺨﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ.‬

              ‫2ـ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻡ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ، ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺳﺎﻟﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ.‬

              ‫3ـ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻳﺒﺎﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﭘﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ.‬

                   ‫4ـ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ ﻟﻐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻨﺪ.‬

                              ‫5ـ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﭼﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﻮﻱ ﻗﻮﺭﻱ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ.‬

‫6ـ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻧﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻫﺪﻳﺔ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺍﺭﺯﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺪﺭ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺑﺒﺮﻧﺪ.‬

                              ‫7ـ ﺍﻭ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺩﻛﺘﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺍﺳﺖ.‬

                   ‫8ـ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺎﺩﺓ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﺭﻛﺎﺏ ﺯﺩﻧﺪ.‬

               ‫9ـ ﺍﻭ ﻋﺼﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻗﻮﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﺍﻍ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ.‬

                  ‫01ـ ﺍﻭ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺻﺒﺤﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﻲ ﻗﻬﻮﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺒﺤﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺵ ﺑﻨﻮﺷﺪ.‬




                  ‫821‬
enough ‫ و‬too ‫ﺑﺎ‬      ‫ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ‬

.‫ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‬enough ‫ ﻳﺎ‬too ‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ‬

               .‫1: ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‬

                               too + ‫ + ﺻﻔﺖ/ ﻗﻴﺪ‬to ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ‬


She is too young to work.
She drives too slowly to arrive on time.




                             ‫ + ﻗﻴﺪ/ ﺻﻔﺖ‬enough + to ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ‬

1.She is rich enough to buy the house.
2.They work hard enough to earn a lot of money.



  .‫2: ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﻭﺷﺨﺺ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭ ﭼﻴﺰ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‬

                        too + ‫ + ﺻﻔﺖ/ ﻗﻴﺪ‬for ‫ + ﺷﺨﺺ‬to ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ‬


1.The car is too expensive for me to buy.
2.You speak too fast for me to under stand.




                     ‫ + ﺻﻔﺖ/ ﻗﻴﺪ‬enough + for ‫ + ﺷﺨﺺ‬to ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ‬

1.The book is easy enough for us to read.
2.You sigh beautifully enough for them to enjoy.




                                               129
‫»‪«Other‬‬           ‫»ﺩﻳﮕﺮ«‬

                                 ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ‪ other‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻧﺎﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺜﻼ:‬
                                  ‫ﹰ‬

‫.‪John has polished other shoes too‬‬
                               ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ‪ another‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ. ﻣﺜﻼ:‬
                                ‫ﹰ‬

‫.‪This child wants another toy‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ )ﭼﻪ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﭼﻪ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ‪ the other‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﺳـﻢ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻳـﺎ‬

                                                                                   ‫ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺜﻼ:‬
                                                                                    ‫ﹰ‬

‫.‪I don't like this hat. I like the other hat‬‬
‫.‪I don't like these shoes but I like the other shoes‬‬
                     ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ﻫﻤﮕﻲ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ.‬




                                                          ‫+ ‪another‬‬                 ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻧﺎﻣﻌﻴﻦ‬

          ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻧﺎﻣﻌﻴﻦ +‪Other‬‬                             ‫‪the other‬‬         ‫+‬      ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‬

                                                             ‫‪the other‬‬         ‫+‬     ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‬



                                     ‫ﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ‪ one‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ones‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﺮﺩ.‬

                                                                                       ‫‪another one‬‬
                                                              ‫‪other ones‬‬              ‫‪the other one‬‬
                                                                                    ‫‪the other ones‬‬



  ‫ﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ another‬ﻭ ‪) the other‬ﻣﻔﺮﺩ( ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬

                                                                                                  ‫ﻛﺮﺩ.‬

‫.‪I don't like this hat, I like the other. Hat‬‬
‫.‪This child wants another hat‬‬




                                                ‫031‬
‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ other‬ﻭ ‪) the other‬ﺟﻤﻊ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺑـﻪ ﻋﻨـﻮﺍﻥ‬

                                ‫ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻑ )‪ (S‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ.‬

‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ـ ﺑﻘﻴﻪ → ‪others‬‬

‫)ﺍﻭﻥ ﻳﻜﻲ ﻫﺎ( ﺁﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ → ‪The others‬‬

‫.‪I don't like these shoes. I Like the others‬‬
‫.‪John has polished others too‬‬


                            ‫ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺡ ﺯﻳﺮ ‪ other‬ﻭ ‪ another‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺻﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ.‬

                                                                 ‫‪each other‬‬                    ‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭﻛﺲ‬
                                      ‫ﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮ - ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ‬
                                                               ‫‪one another‬‬             ‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﻛﺲ‬




                  ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺡ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.‬

‫ﻣﺜﻼ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺣﻤﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻢ ﻭ ﺍﺣﻤﺪ ﻣﺮﺍ ﻣـﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳـﺪ ﺑﻬﺘـﺮ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﮔﻔﺘـﻪ ﺷـﻮﺩ: ﺍﺣﻤـﺪ ﻭ ﻣـﻦ‬
                                                                                                 ‫ﹰ‬

                                                                                   ‫ﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻴﻢ.‬

‫.‪Ahmad and I know each other‬‬
‫.‪People must help one another‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﻴﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻮ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻬـﺖ ﺭﺥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤـﺔ ‪ together‬ﺑـﻪ‬

‫ﻣﻌﻨﻲ )ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ـ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ to gather‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺟﻤـﻊ ﺁﻭﺭﻱ ﻛـﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺷـﺘﺒﺎﻩ‬

                                                                                                     ‫ﻛﺮﺩ.‬

‫.‪Helen and jane study together‬‬

                                                      ‫ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ‪ other‬ﻣﻌﻨﻲ »ﺩﻳﮕﺮ« ﻧﻤﻴﺪﻫﺪ.‬

‫‪every other days = on alternate days‬‬                                                 ‫ﻳﻜﺮﻭﺯ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ‬

‫‪the other day = some days ago‬‬                                                          ‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ‬

‫‪other wise = or else‬‬                                                                    ‫ﻭﺍﻻـ ﻭﮔﺮﻧﻪ‬

‫‪on the other hand = in other words‬‬                                                    ‫ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬


                                                  ‫131‬
‫‪other than = except‬‬                                                                       ‫ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ‬

‫‪one after another = one by one‬‬




                                                                             ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ :‬

                                                                  ‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ.‬


                                                     ‫1ـ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺟﻠﺴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﻨﺪ.‬
                                                                                         ‫ﹰ‬

                                        ‫2ـ ﻣﻦ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﻢ ﻳﻜﺮﻭﺯ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻼﺱ ﻣﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﻴﻢ.‬

                                            ‫3ـ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻳﻢ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻓﺘﻨﺪ ﺧﺮﻳﺪ.‬

                          ‫4ـ ﺳﻪ ﺗﺎ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻴﺰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ـ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻢ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺎ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻢ.‬

‫5ـ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺼﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺣﻴﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ، ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺳﻬﺎﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ‬

                                                                    ‫ﺑﻘﻴﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻼﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺰﺋﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ.‬

                           ‫6ـ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻠﻮﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ.‬
                                                    ‫ﹰ‬

                                          ‫7ـ ﻣﺮﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻼﺱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻮﺩ.‬
                                                       ‫ﹰ‬

                                             ‫8ـ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ.‬

                                            ‫9ـ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺟﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﺓ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺍﺗﻮﺑﻮﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻧﺪ.‬

                                          ‫01ـ ﻣﺎ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﺪﻣﺘﻜﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ.‬
                                                                                           ‫ﹰ‬




                                               ‫231‬
‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ :‬

                                     ‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ.‬




          ‫1ـ ﻣﺮﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺍﻻﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ.‬
                                                       ‫ﹰ‬

                        ‫2ـ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺸﻨﮕﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ.‬

             ‫3ـ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺍﺭﺯﺩ.‬

                ‫4ـ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﭽﻪ ﺷﻜﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺍﻳﻲ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻮﺩ.‬

                               ‫5ـ ﻣﻦ ﺁﺩﺭﺳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻱ ﮔﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ.‬

                 ‫6ـ ﻣﺮﺩﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﺁﻥ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻲ ﭘﺪﺭﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺪ.‬

‫7ـ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺑﭽﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﻤﻴﺖ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮔﻔﺘﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺁﻣﺪ.‬

                           ‫8ـ ﻗﻠﻤﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺮﺍﻧﻲ ﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ.‬

   ‫9ـ ﻣﻬﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺟﺸﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺰﺑﺎﻥ ﺗﺸﻜﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ.‬

  ‫01ـ ﺁﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺣﻴﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺷﺎﮔﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﻤﻴﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ.‬

                        ‫11ـ ﭘﻴﺮﺍﻫﻨﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﻱ ﭼﻤﺪﺍﻥ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ.‬

                 ‫21ـ ﺍﻭ ﻛﻔﺸﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻡ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﻧﭙﻮﺷﻴﺪ.‬

          ‫31ـ ﺗﻮﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻴﺒﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﮔﺮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺨﺮﻱ.‬

       ‫41ـ ﭘﺴﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﻤﻴﺖ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﮔﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻮﺩ.‬
                     ‫ﹰ‬

                 ‫51ـ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺗﺎﻗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮﺩﻱ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻢ.‬




                  ‫331‬
‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ :‬

                                                                  ‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ.‬




                                                          ‫1ـ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ.‬

‫?‪Isn’t this the largest building in this area‬‬
                                                               ‫2ـ ﺍﻭ ﺯﻳﺒﺎﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﮔﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻏﭽﻪ ﺭﺍ ﭼﻴﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ.‬

‫.‪He had picked the most beautiful flower from this garden‬‬
                                                              ‫3ـ ﻫﻠﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺮﺵ ﺑﺎﻫﻮﺵ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ.‬

‫.‪Helen isn't so/as intelligent as her sister‬‬
                                                       ‫4ـ ﺍﻭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺮﺍﻧﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻫﺪﻳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺪﺭﺵ ﺑﺒﺮﺩ.‬

‫.‪He is supposed to take the most expensive present for his father‬‬

                                                  ‫5ـ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﻤﻴﺖ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ.‬

‫.‪Mr. Smith is the fastest typist in this office‬‬
                                                      ‫6ـ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺎ ﮔﺮﺍﻧﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﻱ.‬

‫.‪Our house is more expensive than the house that you have bought‬‬
                                                ‫7ـ ﺍﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ.‬
                                                              ‫ﹰ‬

‫.‪He used to live in the smallest house in this street‬‬
                                   ‫8ـ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻢ ﺩﺭﺍﺯﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺸﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ 42 ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ.‬

‫.‪I could drive the longest road in this country for 24 hours‬‬
                                                      ‫9ـ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﻛﻔﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻮ ﺍﺭﺯﺍﻧﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.‬




                                               ‫431‬
I think, your shoes are cheaper than mine
                                                  .‫01ـ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻳﺒﺎﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻫﺪﻳﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﻡ‬

This is the most interesting present that I have bought.




                                            135
‫ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ‪Relative Pronouns‬‬                  ‫ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ‬

‫ﻗﺒﻼ ﮔﻔﺘﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ، ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻠﻬـﺎﻱ‬
                                                                                                      ‫ﹰ‬

‫‪ Link‬ﻳﺎ ﺭﺑﻂ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ. ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ، ﺷﻜﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻮﻥ ﭼﻨﺎﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ ﻭﺻـﻔﻲ‬

                  ‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.‬

                                 ‫ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ + )ﻛﻪ( ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ + ﺍﺳﻢ‬

‫ﭘﺲ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ؛ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﺖ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ. ﺧﺎﺻـﻴﺖ‬

‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣـﻲ ﻛﻨـﺪ.‬

‫ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻴﻢ ﺑﻬﺮ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﻫﻤﺔ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ »ﻛﻪ« ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ )ﻙ ـ ﻩ( ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴـﻲ‬

                                    ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﺸﺎﻥ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺡ.‬

          ‫1ـ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪ who‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.‬

‫.‪The man‬‬            ‫.‪The man works here‬‬
‫.‪…the man who works here‬‬
     ‫2ـ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪ whom‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.‬

‫‪The man‬‬            ‫.‪I know the man‬‬

‫.‪…the man whom I know‬‬
   ‫3ـ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪ which‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.‬

‫‪The bus‬‬            ‫.‪The bus stops here everyday‬‬

‫.‪…the bus which stops here everyday‬‬
  ‫4ـ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪ which‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.‬

‫‪The book‬‬              ‫.‪I study the book‬‬
‫.‪…the book which I study‬‬
            ‫5ـ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ‪ where‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.‬

‫.‪The house‬‬             ‫.‪they live in it‬‬
‫.) ‪the house where they live ( in‬‬
                            ‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻭﻗﺘﻴﻜﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪ where‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ.‬


                                                  ‫631‬
‫6ـ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ‪ when‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.‬

‫.‪The year‬‬            ‫.‪I was born in the year‬‬
‫.‪The year when I was born‬‬
                  ‫7ـ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺁﻥ ‪ whose‬ﺍﺳﺖ.‬

‫‪The man‬‬           ‫.‪his wife works with me‬‬
‫.‪…The man whose wife works with me‬‬
‫‪…The dog whose name was Top‬‬                ‫ﻳﺎ‬    ‫.‪the dog the name of which was top of‬‬

‫‪ of which‬ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛـﺮﺩ‬      ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ‪ whose‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺠـﺎﻱ ‪ whose‬ﺍﺯ‬

‫ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ whose‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ‪ whose‬ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ‪ whose‬ﺍﺯ ‪ of which‬ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬

                                                                                              ‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ.‬

‫…‪The room whose door‬‬
‫…‪The room the door of which‬‬
    ‫8ـ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺁﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ‪ whose‬ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.‬

‫9ـ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ‪ which‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ‪ The thing‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺠـﺎﻱ ﺗﺮﻛﻴـﺐ ‪ The thing which‬ﺍﺯ‬

                                                                    ‫‪ what‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ. ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ:‬

‫.‪The thing which you need is fresh air‬‬
‫.‪What you need is fresh air‬‬
       ‫01ـ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻭ ﻋﻠﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ‪ why‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.‬

‫.‪The reason‬‬              ‫.‪I study English for that reason‬‬
‫.‪The reason why I study English is that I want to go abroad‬‬
‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ ﻣﻬﻢ: ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ‪ The reason why‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤـﺔ‬

                                                               ‫ﺭﺑﻂ ‪ That‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﻪ ‪. because‬‬




                                                ‫731‬
‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﺳﻢ، ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻـﻮﻟﻲ )‪ ،(who‬ﻫﻤـﺔ ﺿـﻤﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﻜـﺎﺭ ﻣـﻲ‬

                                       ‫ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ They‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ‪ Those‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺜﻼ:‬
                                        ‫ﹰ‬

‫.‪I who work hard‬‬               ‫‪we who work hard‬‬
‫.‪You who work hard‬‬             ‫‪you who work hard‬‬
‫.‪It who works hard‬‬
‫.‪She who works hard‬‬              ‫.‪Those who work hard‬‬
‫.‪He who works hard‬‬



                                                              ‫1. ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻨﻲ ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ »ﻛﻪ« ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ، 3 ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ‪ whom ، who‬ﻭ ‪) which‬ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻟﻲ( ﻗﺎﺑـﻞ ﺟـﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﺷـﺪﻥ ﺑـﺎ ‪that‬‬

                                                                                 ‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ:‬

‫.‪The man who works here is my uncle‬‬
        ‫‪that‬‬

‫.‪The man whom you saw yesterday wants you‬‬
        ‫‪that‬‬

‫.‪The house which is on the corner is mine‬‬
          ‫‪that‬‬

‫.‪The house which you bought is too expensive‬‬
          ‫‪that‬‬

                                                               ‫2. ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺬﻑ »ﻛﻪ« ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ‬
                   ‫ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ‪ whom‬ﻭ ‪) which‬ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻟﻲ( ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬

‫.‪The man which you saw yesterday wants you‬‬
‫.‪The house which you bought is too expensive‬‬


                                                         ‫3. ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ‬
                                                   ‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ.‬

                          ‫1ـ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ )‪ (necessary‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ )‪ (defining‬ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ.‬

             ‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺷﺎﻥ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﻣﺜﻼ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﺜﻞ:‬
                             ‫ﹰ‬

‫.‪a writer is a person‬‬



                                               ‫831‬
‫ﺷﻨﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻪ ‪ Person‬ﺑﻔﻬﻤﺪ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻫﺮ ﺟﻤﻠـﺔ ﻭﺻـﻔﻲ‬

                                               ‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻣﺜﻼ:‬
                                                ‫ﹰ‬

‫.‪a writer is a person who writes novel‬‬


                      ‫2ـ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ )‪ (unnecessary‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ‪ none defining‬ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ.‬

‫ﺟﻤﻼﺗﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺷﺎﻥ ﺻﺪﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣـﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳـﻢ ﺑﻜـﺎﺭ‬

                                                                        ‫ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺜﻼ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﺜﻞ:‬
                                                                                        ‫ﹰ‬

‫.‪Hafez is a great poet‬‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻫﺮ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺣـﺎﻓﻆ ﺑﻴـﺎﻥ ﺷـﻮﺩ ﺻﺪﺩﺭﺻـﺪ ﺿـﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ ﻭ ﺑـﻪ ﺁﻥ‬

                                                                       ‫)‪ (unnecessary‬ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ. ﻣﺜﻼ:‬
                                                                        ‫ﹰ‬

‫.‪Hafez who lives in Shiraz, is a great poet‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ )‪ (unnecessary‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﻣﺎ )،( ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧـﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺳـﻢ ﻗﺒﻠﺸـﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳـﺎﻣﻲ‬

                                                                                       ‫ﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﺳﺖ.‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﺔ ﻣﻬﻢ: ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺟـﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻨﻲ ﻭ ﺣـﺬﻑ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ ﻫـﺎﻱ ‪ none defining‬ﺑﻜـﺎﺭ ﻧﻤـﻲ ﺭﻭﻧـﺪ ﻭﻟـﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ ﻫـﺎﻱ‬

                                                                         ‫‪ defining‬ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ.‬




                                                                          ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ :‬

                                                                ‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ.‬




                                       ‫1ـ ﻣﺮﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻮﺩ.‬
                                                    ‫ﹰ‬




                                              ‫931‬
‫2ـ ﺁﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺯﻭﺩ ﺑﻴﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻣﻮﻓﻖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ.‬

       ‫3ـ ﻣﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻮﻝ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺟﻴﺐ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻡ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺩ ﻓﻘﻴﺮ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻛﻨﻢ.‬

     ‫4ـ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺻﻒ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻧﺎﻥ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺖ.‬

          ‫5ـ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻧﺰﺩﻡ ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﺎ ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﺑﻮﺩ.‬

      ‫6ـ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺧﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ، ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﻥ ﺑﻮﺩ.‬
                               ‫ﹰ‬

           ‫7ـ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺩﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺵ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻲ ﻧﺪﻳﺪﻡ.‬

  ‫8ـ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﺗﻮ ﺁﻥ ﺳﻴﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻱ. ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭ.‬

                     ‫9ـ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﺠﺰ ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﺩ.‬

‫01ـ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺨﺮﺩ ﮔﺮﺍﻧﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ.‬




              ‫041‬
‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺣﺪﺳﻲ ﻭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺑﺮ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟـﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳـﺮ ﻧﺸـﺎﻥ‬

                                                                                           ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ.‬

‫‪to do‬‬                                                             ‫‪ does-did‬ـ‬
‫‪to have‬‬                                                           ‫‪ has-had‬ـ‬
‫‪to be‬‬                                                             ‫‪ am-is-are-was-were‬ـ‬
‫‪to need‬‬                                                           ‫ـ ـ‬
‫‪can‬‬                                                         ‫‪ Could‬ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻦ‬

‫‪may‬‬                                                     ‫‪ Might‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬

‫‪must‬‬                                                            ‫ـ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬

‫‪shall‬‬                                                    ‫‪ Should‬ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ‬

‫‪will‬‬                                                     ‫‪ Would‬ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ‬

                               ‫ـ‬                              ‫‪ used to‬ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ‬
                                                              ‫ﹰ‬

                              ‫ـ‬                                 ‫‪ ought to‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬

                              ‫ـ‬                           ‫‪ to be supposed to‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬

                              ‫ـ‬                       ‫‪ had better‬ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ‬

                              ‫ـ‬                                   ‫‪ would rather‬ـ‬

                              ‫ـ‬                                 ‫‪ have to‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬




‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ )‪ (can, may, shall, will, must‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻳﺸﺔ ﻣﺼﺪﺭﻱ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻣﺪﺍﻝ ﮔﻮﻳﻨـﺪ‬

                                                                                             ‫)‪.(modal‬‬

                              ‫ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ. ﻛﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ:‬

‫‪ would-should-might-could‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﻝ ﻭﻣﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﺎ ﺳـﻪ ﻧـﻮﻉ ﻣﺼـﺪﺭ ﺳـﺎﺩﻩ ،‬

                                               ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﻢ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺣﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ.‬


                                                ‫141‬
‫1ـ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ: ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﻝ ﻭ ﻣﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺣﺎﺻـﻠﻪ ﺯﻣـﺎﻥ ﺣـﺎﻝ ﻭ ﻳـﺎ‬

                                                         ‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ. )ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ(‬

‫.‪Bob can come now. → Bob can come tomorrow‬‬
‫.‪Bob could come now. → Bob could come tomorrow‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺸﺘﻘﻬﺎ، ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬

                                                     ‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.‬

‫.‪Bob could come yesterday‬‬
‫.‪I knew that Bob could come‬‬
                                                                                     ‫2ـ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ:‬

                   ‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ‪ Should‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺣﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻝ ـ ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﻣﺜﻼ:‬
                    ‫ﹰ‬

‫.‪Helen should be resting‬‬         ‫)ﻫﻠﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﺏ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭﻟﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ(‬

‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ، ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﺍﮔـﺮ ﻇـﺎﻫﺮ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ‬

                                                                     ‫ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ، ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜﻼ:‬
                                                                      ‫ﹰ‬

‫.‪Hellen Shouldn’t be resting‬‬


                               ‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ‪ may‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺣﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ.‬

‫.‪It may be raining‬‬             ‫ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ‬

      ‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺷﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺣﺪﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺯﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.‬

‫3ـ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ: ﺑﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ‪ can , must , may‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺣﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﺣﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜﻼ:‬
 ‫ﹰ‬

‫ﻫﻠﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. .‪Hellen must have seen the film‬‬

‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﺣﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻭ ﻗﺮﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺣﺪﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺯﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷـﺘﻪ ﺭﺥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‬

                     ‫ﻣﺜﻼ ﺍﺯﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻫﻠﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺣﺪﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺯﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.‬
                                                                                                    ‫ﹰ‬




                                                   ‫241‬
‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻗﺘـﻲ ‪ might-ought to-should-could-would‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﻴـﺐ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ ﺟﻤﻠـﺔ ﺣﺎﺻـﻠﻪ ﮔﺬﺷـﺘﺔ‬

                                                                                         ‫ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ.‬

  ‫‪could ‬‬
 ‫‪should ‬‬‫‪‬‬
 ‫)ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ( ‪would  + have P.P‬‬
  ‫‪might ‬‬
         ‫‪‬‬
‫‪ought to ‬‬

                                                                                                    ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ:‬

‫.‪I should have gone there‬‬                                              ‫ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻲﺭﻓﺘﻢ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ )ﻛﻪ ﻧﺮﻓﺘﻢ(.‬

‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ‪ not‬ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑـﺎﻻ‬

                   ‫ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ‪ not‬ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ:‬

‫.‪I shouldn’t have gone there‬‬                                           ‫ﻣﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻲﺭﻓﺘﻢ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ )ﻭﻟﻲ ﺭﻓﺘﻢ(.‬




                                                                              ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ :‬

                                                                   ‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ.‬




                                                   ‫1ـ ﭘﺪﺭﻡ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﭘﻴﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ. ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﻭﺧﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.‬

                                                       ‫2ـ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ. ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﻱ ﻛﻤﺪ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻤﺸﺎﻥ.‬

                                     ‫3ـ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﻋﻤﻮﻳﻢ ﺟﺎ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻢ. ﭼﻮﻥ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺟﻴﺒﻢ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ.‬




                                                ‫341‬
‫4ـ ﺗﻮ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﻠﻮﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺗﻮﻫﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻱ.‬

       ‫5ـ ﭘﺪﺭﻡ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻓﺖ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺩﻛﺘﺮ )ﭼﻮﻥ ﭼﺸﻤﻬﺎﻳﺶ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ(.‬

‫6ـ ﺗﻮ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﻧﺴﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺷﻮﻱ ﻧﻤﻴﺪﻭﻧﻢ ﭼﺮﺍ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻱ.‬

        ‫7ـ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻑ ﻛﻨﺪ. ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻲ.‬

  ‫8ـ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﺪﺭﻡ ﺯﻭﺩﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ.‬

                            ‫9ـ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺤﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻔﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.‬

                              ‫01ـ ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.‬




              ‫441‬
‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪﺓ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬
  ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻻﻟﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ.‬

‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ: ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣـﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺘـﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺯﻣـﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ‬

                                                                                              ‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ.‬

       ‫ﺗﺎ + ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ + ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ← ﺁﻳﻨﺪﺓ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬




                                                       ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ: ﺗﺎ ﺳﺎﻝ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺑﻴﺮﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺭﻍ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺼﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻢ.‬

‫.‪I will have graduated from high school by next year‬‬
                                                                       ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ: ﺭﺿﺎ ﺗﺎ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ 5 ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺘﻪ ﺧﻮﻧﻪ.‬

‫.‪Reza will have returned home by five o’clock‬‬
                               ‫ﻃﺮﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ: ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.‬

       ‫‪Subject + will have + Past Participle‬‬




                                                                                       ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ:‬

                                       ‫1ـ ﺗﺎ + ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ← )‪ (By tomorrow‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ + ‪By‬‬

                                                       ‫‪in ‬‬
                                                            ‫‪ two weeks‬‬        ‫2ـ ﺗﺎ + ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ←‬
                                                     ‫‪within ‬‬

                                                                    ‫3ـ ﺗﺎ + ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ← ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬

                                                               ‫ﺗﺎ + ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ← ﺁﻳﻨﺪﺓ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬          ‫4ـ‬



                                                       ‫‪by the time‬‬
            ‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬                                  ‫‪before‬‬                           ‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ +‬

            ‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬                                  ‫‪as soon as‬‬                       ‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ +‬

                                                        ‫‪when‬‬



                                                ‫541‬
‫‪Conditionals‬‬                                 ‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ‬

‫ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﻜﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻁ )‪ (if clause‬ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺘﻴﺠـﻪ‬

                                                                   ‫ﻳﺎ ﺟﺰﺍﺀ )‪ (main clause‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ:‬

                              ‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺷﺮﻁ ، ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻁ + ‪if‬‬



‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻮﺷﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻛﺎﻣـﺎ )ﻭ(‬

                                                                                       ‫ﻭﺳﻂ ﺩﻭ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ.‬

                                 ‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻁ + ‪ + if‬ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﺰﺍﺀ‬



‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻣﺎ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ‬

                                                                                         ‫ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ.‬

‫ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺳﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ. ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ـ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻫﺴـﺘﻨﺪ‬

                                                                                               ‫ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺡ:‬

                                                             ‫1ـ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻭﻝ: ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ.‬

                                ‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻁ‬                    ‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﺰﺍﺀ‬
                     ‫+ ‪if‬‬
                                   ‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬



‫.‪If Helen has money, she can buy the car‬‬
                                                        ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻠﻦ ﭘﻮﻟﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. ﺍﻭ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺭﻭ ﺑﺨﺮﺩ.‬

                                ‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ )‪ (Possible‬ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ.‬




                                                 ‫641‬
‫2ـ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻭﻡ: ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ.‬

                               ‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻁ‬                   ‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﺰﺍﺀ‬
                    ‫+ ‪if‬‬                        ‫ﻭ‬
                                 ‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬                 ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ + ﻣﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ‬



‫.‪If Helen had money now, she could buy the car‬‬
                                                        ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻠﻦ ﺍﻻﻥ ﭘﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﻧﺴﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺨﺮﺩ.‬

‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻧﻤـﻲ ﻛﻨـﺪ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻧـﻮﻉ‬

                                                                           ‫ﺷﺮﻃﻲ )‪ (imaginary‬ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ.‬

                                                          ‫3ـ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﻮﻡ: ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ.‬




                    ‫+ ‪if‬‬
                               ‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻁ‬             ‫ﻭ‬          ‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﺰﺍﺀ‬
                               ‫‪have + P.P‬‬                  ‫‪ + have + P.P‬ﻣﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ‬


‫.‪If Hellen had had money, she could have bought the book yesterday‬‬
                                                        ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻠﻦ ﺩﻳﺮﻭﺯ ﭘﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺨﺮﺩ.‬

‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪﻩ، ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻧﻴﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧـﺪ‬

                                   ‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻳﺎ )‪ (impossible‬ﻳﺎ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ.‬




                                                                           ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻭ ﺳﻮﻡ‬

                                          ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻭ ﺳﻮﻡ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜﻼ:‬
                                           ‫ﹰ‬

                                                          ‫1ـ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﭘﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﻡ.‬

‫.‪If I had money today, I would buy this book‬‬
                                                          ‫2ـ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻳﺮﻭﺯ ﭘﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﻡ.‬

‫.‪If I had money yesterday , I would have bought this car‬‬




                                                ‫741‬
Present perfect progressive but in farsi
Present perfect progressive but in farsi
Present perfect progressive but in farsi
Present perfect progressive but in farsi
Present perfect progressive but in farsi
Present perfect progressive but in farsi
Present perfect progressive but in farsi
Present perfect progressive but in farsi
Present perfect progressive but in farsi
Present perfect progressive but in farsi
Present perfect progressive but in farsi
Present perfect progressive but in farsi
Present perfect progressive but in farsi
Present perfect progressive but in farsi
Present perfect progressive but in farsi
Present perfect progressive but in farsi
Present perfect progressive but in farsi
Present perfect progressive but in farsi
Present perfect progressive but in farsi
Present perfect progressive but in farsi
Present perfect progressive but in farsi
Present perfect progressive but in farsi
Present perfect progressive but in farsi
Present perfect progressive but in farsi
Present perfect progressive but in farsi
Present perfect progressive but in farsi
Present perfect progressive but in farsi
Present perfect progressive but in farsi
Present perfect progressive but in farsi
Present perfect progressive but in farsi
Present perfect progressive but in farsi
Present perfect progressive but in farsi
Present perfect progressive but in farsi
Present perfect progressive but in farsi
Present perfect progressive but in farsi
Present perfect progressive but in farsi
Present perfect progressive but in farsi
Present perfect progressive but in farsi

Contenu connexe

Dernier

Paris 2024 Olympic Geographies - an activity
Paris 2024 Olympic Geographies - an activityParis 2024 Olympic Geographies - an activity
Paris 2024 Olympic Geographies - an activityGeoBlogs
 
SOCIAL AND HISTORICAL CONTEXT - LFTVD.pptx
SOCIAL AND HISTORICAL CONTEXT - LFTVD.pptxSOCIAL AND HISTORICAL CONTEXT - LFTVD.pptx
SOCIAL AND HISTORICAL CONTEXT - LFTVD.pptxiammrhaywood
 
1029 - Danh muc Sach Giao Khoa 10 . pdf
1029 -  Danh muc Sach Giao Khoa 10 . pdf1029 -  Danh muc Sach Giao Khoa 10 . pdf
1029 - Danh muc Sach Giao Khoa 10 . pdfQucHHunhnh
 
Russian Escort Service in Delhi 11k Hotel Foreigner Russian Call Girls in Delhi
Russian Escort Service in Delhi 11k Hotel Foreigner Russian Call Girls in DelhiRussian Escort Service in Delhi 11k Hotel Foreigner Russian Call Girls in Delhi
Russian Escort Service in Delhi 11k Hotel Foreigner Russian Call Girls in Delhikauryashika82
 
Z Score,T Score, Percential Rank and Box Plot Graph
Z Score,T Score, Percential Rank and Box Plot GraphZ Score,T Score, Percential Rank and Box Plot Graph
Z Score,T Score, Percential Rank and Box Plot GraphThiyagu K
 
1029-Danh muc Sach Giao Khoa khoi 6.pdf
1029-Danh muc Sach Giao Khoa khoi  6.pdf1029-Danh muc Sach Giao Khoa khoi  6.pdf
1029-Danh muc Sach Giao Khoa khoi 6.pdfQucHHunhnh
 
APM Welcome, APM North West Network Conference, Synergies Across Sectors
APM Welcome, APM North West Network Conference, Synergies Across SectorsAPM Welcome, APM North West Network Conference, Synergies Across Sectors
APM Welcome, APM North West Network Conference, Synergies Across SectorsAssociation for Project Management
 
Accessible design: Minimum effort, maximum impact
Accessible design: Minimum effort, maximum impactAccessible design: Minimum effort, maximum impact
Accessible design: Minimum effort, maximum impactdawncurless
 
Holdier Curriculum Vitae (April 2024).pdf
Holdier Curriculum Vitae (April 2024).pdfHoldier Curriculum Vitae (April 2024).pdf
Holdier Curriculum Vitae (April 2024).pdfagholdier
 
Measures of Dispersion and Variability: Range, QD, AD and SD
Measures of Dispersion and Variability: Range, QD, AD and SDMeasures of Dispersion and Variability: Range, QD, AD and SD
Measures of Dispersion and Variability: Range, QD, AD and SDThiyagu K
 
Ecosystem Interactions Class Discussion Presentation in Blue Green Lined Styl...
Ecosystem Interactions Class Discussion Presentation in Blue Green Lined Styl...Ecosystem Interactions Class Discussion Presentation in Blue Green Lined Styl...
Ecosystem Interactions Class Discussion Presentation in Blue Green Lined Styl...fonyou31
 
Arihant handbook biology for class 11 .pdf
Arihant handbook biology for class 11 .pdfArihant handbook biology for class 11 .pdf
Arihant handbook biology for class 11 .pdfchloefrazer622
 
A Critique of the Proposed National Education Policy Reform
A Critique of the Proposed National Education Policy ReformA Critique of the Proposed National Education Policy Reform
A Critique of the Proposed National Education Policy ReformChameera Dedduwage
 
Sports & Fitness Value Added Course FY..
Sports & Fitness Value Added Course FY..Sports & Fitness Value Added Course FY..
Sports & Fitness Value Added Course FY..Disha Kariya
 
BASLIQ CURRENT LOOKBOOK LOOKBOOK(1) (1).pdf
BASLIQ CURRENT LOOKBOOK  LOOKBOOK(1) (1).pdfBASLIQ CURRENT LOOKBOOK  LOOKBOOK(1) (1).pdf
BASLIQ CURRENT LOOKBOOK LOOKBOOK(1) (1).pdfSoniaTolstoy
 
Explore beautiful and ugly buildings. Mathematics helps us create beautiful d...
Explore beautiful and ugly buildings. Mathematics helps us create beautiful d...Explore beautiful and ugly buildings. Mathematics helps us create beautiful d...
Explore beautiful and ugly buildings. Mathematics helps us create beautiful d...christianmathematics
 
Q4-W6-Restating Informational Text Grade 3
Q4-W6-Restating Informational Text Grade 3Q4-W6-Restating Informational Text Grade 3
Q4-W6-Restating Informational Text Grade 3JemimahLaneBuaron
 
Beyond the EU: DORA and NIS 2 Directive's Global Impact
Beyond the EU: DORA and NIS 2 Directive's Global ImpactBeyond the EU: DORA and NIS 2 Directive's Global Impact
Beyond the EU: DORA and NIS 2 Directive's Global ImpactPECB
 
Class 11th Physics NEET formula sheet pdf
Class 11th Physics NEET formula sheet pdfClass 11th Physics NEET formula sheet pdf
Class 11th Physics NEET formula sheet pdfAyushMahapatra5
 
Student login on Anyboli platform.helpin
Student login on Anyboli platform.helpinStudent login on Anyboli platform.helpin
Student login on Anyboli platform.helpinRaunakKeshri1
 

Dernier (20)

Paris 2024 Olympic Geographies - an activity
Paris 2024 Olympic Geographies - an activityParis 2024 Olympic Geographies - an activity
Paris 2024 Olympic Geographies - an activity
 
SOCIAL AND HISTORICAL CONTEXT - LFTVD.pptx
SOCIAL AND HISTORICAL CONTEXT - LFTVD.pptxSOCIAL AND HISTORICAL CONTEXT - LFTVD.pptx
SOCIAL AND HISTORICAL CONTEXT - LFTVD.pptx
 
1029 - Danh muc Sach Giao Khoa 10 . pdf
1029 -  Danh muc Sach Giao Khoa 10 . pdf1029 -  Danh muc Sach Giao Khoa 10 . pdf
1029 - Danh muc Sach Giao Khoa 10 . pdf
 
Russian Escort Service in Delhi 11k Hotel Foreigner Russian Call Girls in Delhi
Russian Escort Service in Delhi 11k Hotel Foreigner Russian Call Girls in DelhiRussian Escort Service in Delhi 11k Hotel Foreigner Russian Call Girls in Delhi
Russian Escort Service in Delhi 11k Hotel Foreigner Russian Call Girls in Delhi
 
Z Score,T Score, Percential Rank and Box Plot Graph
Z Score,T Score, Percential Rank and Box Plot GraphZ Score,T Score, Percential Rank and Box Plot Graph
Z Score,T Score, Percential Rank and Box Plot Graph
 
1029-Danh muc Sach Giao Khoa khoi 6.pdf
1029-Danh muc Sach Giao Khoa khoi  6.pdf1029-Danh muc Sach Giao Khoa khoi  6.pdf
1029-Danh muc Sach Giao Khoa khoi 6.pdf
 
APM Welcome, APM North West Network Conference, Synergies Across Sectors
APM Welcome, APM North West Network Conference, Synergies Across SectorsAPM Welcome, APM North West Network Conference, Synergies Across Sectors
APM Welcome, APM North West Network Conference, Synergies Across Sectors
 
Accessible design: Minimum effort, maximum impact
Accessible design: Minimum effort, maximum impactAccessible design: Minimum effort, maximum impact
Accessible design: Minimum effort, maximum impact
 
Holdier Curriculum Vitae (April 2024).pdf
Holdier Curriculum Vitae (April 2024).pdfHoldier Curriculum Vitae (April 2024).pdf
Holdier Curriculum Vitae (April 2024).pdf
 
Measures of Dispersion and Variability: Range, QD, AD and SD
Measures of Dispersion and Variability: Range, QD, AD and SDMeasures of Dispersion and Variability: Range, QD, AD and SD
Measures of Dispersion and Variability: Range, QD, AD and SD
 
Ecosystem Interactions Class Discussion Presentation in Blue Green Lined Styl...
Ecosystem Interactions Class Discussion Presentation in Blue Green Lined Styl...Ecosystem Interactions Class Discussion Presentation in Blue Green Lined Styl...
Ecosystem Interactions Class Discussion Presentation in Blue Green Lined Styl...
 
Arihant handbook biology for class 11 .pdf
Arihant handbook biology for class 11 .pdfArihant handbook biology for class 11 .pdf
Arihant handbook biology for class 11 .pdf
 
A Critique of the Proposed National Education Policy Reform
A Critique of the Proposed National Education Policy ReformA Critique of the Proposed National Education Policy Reform
A Critique of the Proposed National Education Policy Reform
 
Sports & Fitness Value Added Course FY..
Sports & Fitness Value Added Course FY..Sports & Fitness Value Added Course FY..
Sports & Fitness Value Added Course FY..
 
BASLIQ CURRENT LOOKBOOK LOOKBOOK(1) (1).pdf
BASLIQ CURRENT LOOKBOOK  LOOKBOOK(1) (1).pdfBASLIQ CURRENT LOOKBOOK  LOOKBOOK(1) (1).pdf
BASLIQ CURRENT LOOKBOOK LOOKBOOK(1) (1).pdf
 
Explore beautiful and ugly buildings. Mathematics helps us create beautiful d...
Explore beautiful and ugly buildings. Mathematics helps us create beautiful d...Explore beautiful and ugly buildings. Mathematics helps us create beautiful d...
Explore beautiful and ugly buildings. Mathematics helps us create beautiful d...
 
Q4-W6-Restating Informational Text Grade 3
Q4-W6-Restating Informational Text Grade 3Q4-W6-Restating Informational Text Grade 3
Q4-W6-Restating Informational Text Grade 3
 
Beyond the EU: DORA and NIS 2 Directive's Global Impact
Beyond the EU: DORA and NIS 2 Directive's Global ImpactBeyond the EU: DORA and NIS 2 Directive's Global Impact
Beyond the EU: DORA and NIS 2 Directive's Global Impact
 
Class 11th Physics NEET formula sheet pdf
Class 11th Physics NEET formula sheet pdfClass 11th Physics NEET formula sheet pdf
Class 11th Physics NEET formula sheet pdf
 
Student login on Anyboli platform.helpin
Student login on Anyboli platform.helpinStudent login on Anyboli platform.helpin
Student login on Anyboli platform.helpin
 

En vedette

2024 State of Marketing Report – by Hubspot
2024 State of Marketing Report – by Hubspot2024 State of Marketing Report – by Hubspot
2024 State of Marketing Report – by HubspotMarius Sescu
 
Everything You Need To Know About ChatGPT
Everything You Need To Know About ChatGPTEverything You Need To Know About ChatGPT
Everything You Need To Know About ChatGPTExpeed Software
 
Product Design Trends in 2024 | Teenage Engineerings
Product Design Trends in 2024 | Teenage EngineeringsProduct Design Trends in 2024 | Teenage Engineerings
Product Design Trends in 2024 | Teenage EngineeringsPixeldarts
 
How Race, Age and Gender Shape Attitudes Towards Mental Health
How Race, Age and Gender Shape Attitudes Towards Mental HealthHow Race, Age and Gender Shape Attitudes Towards Mental Health
How Race, Age and Gender Shape Attitudes Towards Mental HealthThinkNow
 
AI Trends in Creative Operations 2024 by Artwork Flow.pdf
AI Trends in Creative Operations 2024 by Artwork Flow.pdfAI Trends in Creative Operations 2024 by Artwork Flow.pdf
AI Trends in Creative Operations 2024 by Artwork Flow.pdfmarketingartwork
 
PEPSICO Presentation to CAGNY Conference Feb 2024
PEPSICO Presentation to CAGNY Conference Feb 2024PEPSICO Presentation to CAGNY Conference Feb 2024
PEPSICO Presentation to CAGNY Conference Feb 2024Neil Kimberley
 
Content Methodology: A Best Practices Report (Webinar)
Content Methodology: A Best Practices Report (Webinar)Content Methodology: A Best Practices Report (Webinar)
Content Methodology: A Best Practices Report (Webinar)contently
 
How to Prepare For a Successful Job Search for 2024
How to Prepare For a Successful Job Search for 2024How to Prepare For a Successful Job Search for 2024
How to Prepare For a Successful Job Search for 2024Albert Qian
 
Social Media Marketing Trends 2024 // The Global Indie Insights
Social Media Marketing Trends 2024 // The Global Indie InsightsSocial Media Marketing Trends 2024 // The Global Indie Insights
Social Media Marketing Trends 2024 // The Global Indie InsightsKurio // The Social Media Age(ncy)
 
Trends In Paid Search: Navigating The Digital Landscape In 2024
Trends In Paid Search: Navigating The Digital Landscape In 2024Trends In Paid Search: Navigating The Digital Landscape In 2024
Trends In Paid Search: Navigating The Digital Landscape In 2024Search Engine Journal
 
5 Public speaking tips from TED - Visualized summary
5 Public speaking tips from TED - Visualized summary5 Public speaking tips from TED - Visualized summary
5 Public speaking tips from TED - Visualized summarySpeakerHub
 
ChatGPT and the Future of Work - Clark Boyd
ChatGPT and the Future of Work - Clark Boyd ChatGPT and the Future of Work - Clark Boyd
ChatGPT and the Future of Work - Clark Boyd Clark Boyd
 
Getting into the tech field. what next
Getting into the tech field. what next Getting into the tech field. what next
Getting into the tech field. what next Tessa Mero
 
Google's Just Not That Into You: Understanding Core Updates & Search Intent
Google's Just Not That Into You: Understanding Core Updates & Search IntentGoogle's Just Not That Into You: Understanding Core Updates & Search Intent
Google's Just Not That Into You: Understanding Core Updates & Search IntentLily Ray
 
Time Management & Productivity - Best Practices
Time Management & Productivity -  Best PracticesTime Management & Productivity -  Best Practices
Time Management & Productivity - Best PracticesVit Horky
 
The six step guide to practical project management
The six step guide to practical project managementThe six step guide to practical project management
The six step guide to practical project managementMindGenius
 
Beginners Guide to TikTok for Search - Rachel Pearson - We are Tilt __ Bright...
Beginners Guide to TikTok for Search - Rachel Pearson - We are Tilt __ Bright...Beginners Guide to TikTok for Search - Rachel Pearson - We are Tilt __ Bright...
Beginners Guide to TikTok for Search - Rachel Pearson - We are Tilt __ Bright...RachelPearson36
 

En vedette (20)

2024 State of Marketing Report – by Hubspot
2024 State of Marketing Report – by Hubspot2024 State of Marketing Report – by Hubspot
2024 State of Marketing Report – by Hubspot
 
Everything You Need To Know About ChatGPT
Everything You Need To Know About ChatGPTEverything You Need To Know About ChatGPT
Everything You Need To Know About ChatGPT
 
Product Design Trends in 2024 | Teenage Engineerings
Product Design Trends in 2024 | Teenage EngineeringsProduct Design Trends in 2024 | Teenage Engineerings
Product Design Trends in 2024 | Teenage Engineerings
 
How Race, Age and Gender Shape Attitudes Towards Mental Health
How Race, Age and Gender Shape Attitudes Towards Mental HealthHow Race, Age and Gender Shape Attitudes Towards Mental Health
How Race, Age and Gender Shape Attitudes Towards Mental Health
 
AI Trends in Creative Operations 2024 by Artwork Flow.pdf
AI Trends in Creative Operations 2024 by Artwork Flow.pdfAI Trends in Creative Operations 2024 by Artwork Flow.pdf
AI Trends in Creative Operations 2024 by Artwork Flow.pdf
 
Skeleton Culture Code
Skeleton Culture CodeSkeleton Culture Code
Skeleton Culture Code
 
PEPSICO Presentation to CAGNY Conference Feb 2024
PEPSICO Presentation to CAGNY Conference Feb 2024PEPSICO Presentation to CAGNY Conference Feb 2024
PEPSICO Presentation to CAGNY Conference Feb 2024
 
Content Methodology: A Best Practices Report (Webinar)
Content Methodology: A Best Practices Report (Webinar)Content Methodology: A Best Practices Report (Webinar)
Content Methodology: A Best Practices Report (Webinar)
 
How to Prepare For a Successful Job Search for 2024
How to Prepare For a Successful Job Search for 2024How to Prepare For a Successful Job Search for 2024
How to Prepare For a Successful Job Search for 2024
 
Social Media Marketing Trends 2024 // The Global Indie Insights
Social Media Marketing Trends 2024 // The Global Indie InsightsSocial Media Marketing Trends 2024 // The Global Indie Insights
Social Media Marketing Trends 2024 // The Global Indie Insights
 
Trends In Paid Search: Navigating The Digital Landscape In 2024
Trends In Paid Search: Navigating The Digital Landscape In 2024Trends In Paid Search: Navigating The Digital Landscape In 2024
Trends In Paid Search: Navigating The Digital Landscape In 2024
 
5 Public speaking tips from TED - Visualized summary
5 Public speaking tips from TED - Visualized summary5 Public speaking tips from TED - Visualized summary
5 Public speaking tips from TED - Visualized summary
 
ChatGPT and the Future of Work - Clark Boyd
ChatGPT and the Future of Work - Clark Boyd ChatGPT and the Future of Work - Clark Boyd
ChatGPT and the Future of Work - Clark Boyd
 
Getting into the tech field. what next
Getting into the tech field. what next Getting into the tech field. what next
Getting into the tech field. what next
 
Google's Just Not That Into You: Understanding Core Updates & Search Intent
Google's Just Not That Into You: Understanding Core Updates & Search IntentGoogle's Just Not That Into You: Understanding Core Updates & Search Intent
Google's Just Not That Into You: Understanding Core Updates & Search Intent
 
How to have difficult conversations
How to have difficult conversations How to have difficult conversations
How to have difficult conversations
 
Introduction to Data Science
Introduction to Data ScienceIntroduction to Data Science
Introduction to Data Science
 
Time Management & Productivity - Best Practices
Time Management & Productivity -  Best PracticesTime Management & Productivity -  Best Practices
Time Management & Productivity - Best Practices
 
The six step guide to practical project management
The six step guide to practical project managementThe six step guide to practical project management
The six step guide to practical project management
 
Beginners Guide to TikTok for Search - Rachel Pearson - We are Tilt __ Bright...
Beginners Guide to TikTok for Search - Rachel Pearson - We are Tilt __ Bright...Beginners Guide to TikTok for Search - Rachel Pearson - We are Tilt __ Bright...
Beginners Guide to TikTok for Search - Rachel Pearson - We are Tilt __ Bright...
 

Present perfect progressive but in farsi

  • 1. ‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ : ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﻻﻟﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺗـﺎ ﺁﻳﻨـﺪﻩ ﺑـﻪ ﻃـﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ.‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ : ﺍﮔﺮ ) ﺗﺎ + ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ) ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ + ﺍﺳﺖ ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ. ﻃﺒﻖ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ :‬ ‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬ ‫)‪(by‬ﺗﺎ+ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ+ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ + )‪ (For‬ﺍﺳﺖ + ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ : ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻛﺮﺩ .‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ + ‪ + by‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ + ‪Subject + will have been + verb + ing+ for‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ: ﺗﺎ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ 8 ﺩﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ .‬ ‫.‪We will have been studying for two hours by eight o’clock‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ: ﺗﺎ ﻣﺎﻩ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ 01 ﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻬﺮﺍﻥ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ .‬ ‫.‪We will have been living in tehran for ten years by next month‬‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ : ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻬﺪﻩ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ‪Will‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ : ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﺴﺖ ﺍﺯ :‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ + ‪By‬‬ ‫801‬
  • 2. ‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ : ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻻﻟﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻭ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳـﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ : ﺍﮔﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ" ﺑﻮﺩ" ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ.‬ ‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ + ) ‪ ( For‬ﺑﻮﺩ + ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ : ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑـﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴـﻲ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣـﻮﻝ ﺯﻳـﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ.‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻋﻞ+ ‪ + before/when‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ + ‪Subject + had been + verb + ing + for‬‬ ‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ +‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ:‬ ‫1- ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺍﻭﻣﺪﻱ ﻧﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻢ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﺩﻡ.‬ ‫.‪I had been teaching for half an hour when you came‬‬ ‫2- ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺰﻧﻲ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻢ ﺁﺷﭙﺰﻱ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ.‬ ‫.‪I had been doing the cooking for two hours before you called‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ : ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻬﺪﻩ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ‪ had‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ.‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ : ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ‪ before, when‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.‬ ‫901‬
  • 3. talkative : ‫ﭘﺮ ﺣﺮﻑ‬ crowded : ‫ﺷﻠﻮﻍ‬ intelligent : ‫ﺑﺎ ﻫﻮﺵ‬ taciturn : ‫ﻛﻢ ﺣﺮﻑ‬ ugly : ‫ﺯﺷﺖ‬ rich : ‫ﺛﺮﻭﺗﻤﻨﺪ‬ considerable : ‫ﭼﺸﻤﮕﻴﺮ – ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ‬ 110
  • 4. ‫‪adjective‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺖ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺖ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻒ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ. ﻣﺜﻼ :‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫. ‪careful student‬‬ ‫ﺩﺍﻧﺶ ﺁﻣﻮﺯ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ، ﻣﺜﻼ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫.‪my new green book‬‬ ‫ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺳﺒﺰ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ : ﺍﮔﺮ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﺑﻄﻲ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ.‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺖ + ‪ + to be‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺖ + ‪ + to get‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺖ + ‪ + to turn‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺖ + ‪ + to become‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺖ + ‪ + to grow‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺖ + ‪ + to make‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ) ﺑﻮﺩﻥ – ﺷﺪﻥ – ﮔﺸﺘﻦ – ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻥ ( ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺟﻨﺒﺔ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺑـﻂ ﺩﺍﺭﻧـﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ‪link‬‬ ‫‪ verb‬ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺭﺑﻂ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ :‬ ‫. ‪My father grew angry‬‬ ‫‪In spring the leaves turn green‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﻬﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﮔﻬﺎ ﺳﺒﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ.‬ ‫. ‪Today the weather got cold‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺷﺪ.‬ ‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ : ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﺑﻄﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ) ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ. ( .‬ ‫‪Seem / Appear/ Look/ Sound/ Taste / Smell / Feel‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺖ +‬ ‫111‬
  • 5. ‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ : ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﺑﻄﻲ ﻫﻴﭽﮕﺎﻩ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺜﻼ:‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫.‪he looks( angrily ) angry‬‬ ‫ﺍﻭ ﻋﺼﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺭﺳﺪ .‬ ‫.‪the soup tastes ( unusually ) unusual‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮﭖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺭﺳﺪ.‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺍﺷـﺎﺭﻩ ‪ this, that‬ﺑـﺎ ﺍﺳـﻢ ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺧـﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻔـﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺟﻤـﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ.‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ:‬ ‫‪This book‬‬ ‫. ‪These books‬‬ ‫‪That book‬‬ ‫. ‪Those books‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ : ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺳﻪ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ . ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺯﻳﺮ :‬ ‫1- ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ : ﺩﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮﻣﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻨﺪ ﻣﺜﻼ :‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫.‪Helen is as tall as Susan‬‬ ‫ﻫﻠﻦ ﻫﻢ ﻗﺪ ﺳﻮﺯﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ .‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺍﺳﺖ :‬ ‫‪as‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺖ‬ ‫‪as‬‬ ‫‪not so‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺖ‬ ‫‪as‬‬ ‫.‪Hellen is as tall as Susan‬‬ ‫.‪Hellen is not so tall as Susan‬‬ ‫2-ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﺮﺗﺮ ﻳﺎ ) ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ ( : ﺩﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺪﺗﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ.‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻼ : ﻋﻠﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻬﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻗﺪﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ .‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫211‬
  • 6. ‫ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ )‪ ( than‬ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﺗﺮ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺷـﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪ er‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺜﻼ:‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫.‪Hellen is taller than Susan‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺻﻔﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺳﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻗﺒﻠﺸﺎﻥ ) ‪ ( more‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.‬ ‫. ‪My book is more interesting than yours‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻼ :‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺻﻔﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺑﻌﺪﹰﺍ ﺗﺒﺼﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ.‬ ‫3- ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﺮﺗﺮﻳﻦ : ﭼﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺗﺮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﺜﻼ : ﻫﻠﻦ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻗﺪﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺩﺍﻧﺶ ﺁﻣﻮﺯ ﻛﻼﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ .‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ the‬ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻭ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺮﺟﻤـﻪ‬ ‫ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ )ﺗﺮﻳﻦ( ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺷﺎﻥ ‪ est‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺜﻼ:‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫. ‪Hellen is the tallest student in the class‬‬ ‫ﻭﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺻﻔﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺳﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻗﺒﻠﺸﺎﻥ ‪ most‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺜﻼ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫.‪My book is the most interesting book in the library‬‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺼﺮﻩ : ﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺁﻧﻬﺎﻳﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ‪ y‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ ‪er‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ‪ est‬ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ .‬ ‫‪happy → happier than → the happiest‬‬ ‫‪busy → busier than → the busiest‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺷﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ‪ y‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ ‪ more‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ‪ most‬ﻗﺒﻠﺸﺎﻥ ﺍﺿـﺎﻓﻪ ﻣـﻲ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ.‬ ‫‪Active / more active than / the most active‬‬ ‫‪Comic / more comic than / the most comic‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ :ﭼﻨﺪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎ ﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ.‬ ‫311‬
  • 7. ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻖ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬ good – well better than the best bad - ill worse than the worst much many More than the most Little Less than the least ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻋﻀﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﻩ‬ elder ------ the eldest old ‫ﻓﺮﺩ – ﺷﺨﺺ‬ older than the oldest ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬ Farther than the farthest far ‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬ Further than the furthest 114
  • 8. ‫‪The same as‬‬ ‫‪ : same‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮕﻲ ﻭ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ the‬ﺑـﻪ ﻛـﺎﺭ ﻣـﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻌﻨـﻲ )‬ ‫ﻫﻤﺎﻥ – ﻳﻚ ( ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﺜﻼ :‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫.‪Hellen and Jane live in the same street‬‬ ‫ﻫﻠﻦ ﻭ ﺟﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ .‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﮔﺮﺍﻣﺮﻱ : ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻬﺎﻱ ﮔﺮﺍﻣﺮﻱ ﺻﻔﺎﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺷﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ) ‪ ( er , re , le , ow‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺻﻔﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺷﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ‪ y‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ‪ er‬ﻭ ‪ est‬ﻣـﻲ ﺩﻫـﺪ. ﺍﻣـﺎ ﻫﻤـﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻬﺎﻱ ﮔﺮﺍﻣﺮﻱ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺫﻛﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺎﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ‪ most , more‬ﻫـﻢ ﺗﻔﻀـﻴﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻋـﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﺮﺩ.‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻖ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫‪narrow‬‬ ‫‪more narrow than‬‬ ‫‪the most narrow‬‬ ‫‪narrow‬‬ ‫‪narrower than‬‬ ‫‪the narrowest‬‬ ‫‪simple‬‬ ‫‪more simple than‬‬ ‫‪the most simple‬‬ ‫‪simple‬‬ ‫‪simpler than‬‬ ‫‪the simplest‬‬ ‫‪clever‬‬ ‫‪more clever than‬‬ ‫‪the most clever‬‬ ‫‪clever‬‬ ‫‪cleverer than‬‬ ‫‪the cleverest‬‬ ‫‪obscure‬‬ ‫‪more obscure than‬‬ ‫‪the most obscure‬‬ ‫‪obscure‬‬ ‫‪obscurer than‬‬ ‫‪the obscurest‬‬ ‫ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻣﻼﻳﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺖ :‬ ‫1- ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺷﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ‪ y‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ happy‬ﻫﻨﮕـﺎﻡ ﺍﺿـﺎﻓﻪ ﺷـﺪﻥ ‪ er,est‬ﺣـﺮﻑ ‪y‬‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ‪ i‬ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.‬ ‫‪happy → happier than → the happiest‬‬ ‫511‬
  • 9. ‫2-ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺷﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ‪ e‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ wide‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ‪ st , r‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣـﻲ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ.‬ ‫‪Wide‬‬ ‫‪wider than‬‬ ‫‪the widest‬‬ ‫3- ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺘﻬﺎﻳﻴﻜﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺁﺧﺮﺷﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﻲ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺍﻧﻜـﻪ ﻗﺒـﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑـﻲ‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﻚ ﺻﺪﺍﺩﺍﺭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ big‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪﻫﺎﻱ ‪ er‬ﻭ ‪ est‬ﺣـﺮﻑ ﺑـﻲ ﺻـﺪﺍﻱ‬ ‫ﺁﺧﺮ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.‬ ‫‪Big‬‬ ‫‪bigger than‬‬ ‫‪the biggest‬‬ ‫‪crowded‬‬ ‫ﺷﻠﻮﻍ‬ ‫‪a pair of shoes‬‬ ‫ﻳﻚ ﺟﻔﺖ ﻛﻔﺶ‬ ‫‪busy‬‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﺎﺭ – ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ‬ ‫‪trousers‬‬ ‫ﺷﻠﻮﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪noisy‬‬ ‫ﭘﺮ ﺳﺮﻭ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫‪scissors‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﭽﻲ‬ ‫‪glass‬‬ ‫ﻋﻴﻨﻚ‬ ‫‪ball point pen‬‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪cane‬‬ ‫ﻧﯽ - ﻗﻠﻢ ﺧﻮﺷﻨﻮﻳﺴﻲ‬ ‫‪fountain pen‬‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﻮﻳﺲ‬ ‫ﺑﻘﻴﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ‪: the same‬‬ ‫) ﻣﺜﻞ – ﺷﺒﻴﻪ – ﻣﺎﻧﻨـﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪ the same‬ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ as‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪ the same as‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ‬ ‫( ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﺩﻑ ﺑﺎ ‪ like‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜﻼ :‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫.‪Your shoes are the same as mine‬‬ ‫611‬
  • 10. ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪ the same‬ﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ as‬ﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.‬ ‫‪ + as‬ﺍﺳﻢ + ‪the same‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮕﻲ ﺩﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﻧﺴـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﭼـﻮﻥ ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪the‬‬ ‫‪ same‬ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ ﻧﺎﮔﺰﻳﺮ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ :‬ ‫.‪Hellen is as old as Susan‬‬ ‫.‪Hellen is the same age as Susan‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﻢ .‬ ‫- ‪tall‬‬ ‫‪big‬‬ ‫ﺑﺰﺭﮒ‬ ‫‪size‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬ ‫‪long‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺍﺯ‬ ‫‪length‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺍﺯﺍ‬ ‫‪wide‬‬ ‫ﭘﻬﻦ‬ ‫‪width‬‬ ‫ﭘﻬﻨﺎ‬ ‫‪deep‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻴﻖ‬ ‫‪depth‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻖ‬ ‫‪old‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﻦ – ﭘﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪age‬‬ ‫ﺳﻦ‬ ‫‪high‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ – ﺑﻠﻨﺪ‬ ‫‪height‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬ ‫711‬
  • 11. ‫‪adverb‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ‪ ly‬ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻴـﺪ ﻣـﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪ. ﻣﺜﻼ :‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫‪sincere‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﻠﺺ‬ ‫‪sincerely‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﻠﺼﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫‪quick‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫‪quickly‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬ ‫‪careful‬‬ ‫ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‬ ‫‪carefully‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻨﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻗﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺟﺎﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﻣﺜﻼ :‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫. ‪Hellen speak slowly‬‬ ‫. ‪Hellen apeaks English slowly‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﺎﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻼً :‬ ‫. ‪He left the room quickly‬‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻳﺮ ‪ ly‬ﻧﻤﻲ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪ ly‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ.‬ ‫‪Fast‬‬ ‫‪Hard‬‬ ‫‪Short‬‬ ‫‪Long‬‬ ‫‪Little‬‬ ‫‪Much‬‬ ‫‪Late‬‬ ‫‪Early‬‬ ‫‪Near‬‬ ‫‪Far‬‬ ‫‪Still‬‬ ‫‪Just‬‬ ‫‪Enough‬‬ ‫‪Straight‬‬ ‫‪Soon‬‬ ‫‪Low‬‬ ‫811‬
  • 12. ‫‪a nap‬‬ ‫ﭼﺮﺕ ﺯﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪a shower‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺵ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬ ‫‪a test-exam‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ‬ ‫‪Take‬‬ ‫‪a bath‬‬ ‫ﺣﻤﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬ ‫‪a dictation‬‬ ‫ﺩﻳﻜﺘﻪ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ‬ ‫‪a trip‬‬ ‫ﺳﻔﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪a vehicle‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪﺍﻱ ﺷﺪﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ :‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ.‬ ‫1- ﻫﻠﻦ ﻣﺜﻞ ﭘﺪﺭﺵ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻬﺮﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ .‬ ‫. ‪Hellen doesn’t behave the same kind as her father‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﺗﻮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺑﺪﻫﻢ.‬ ‫3- ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ ﻣﺎﻝ ﺗﻮ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ.‬ ‫4- ﺍﻭ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺸﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ.‬ ‫.‪He types the letters faster than my secretery‬‬ ‫911‬
  • 13. ‫5- ﻣﻦ ﻫﻴﭽﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﺮﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﻢ ﺑﻴﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﻡ.‬ ‫. ‪I never get up later than my parents‬‬ ‫6- ﺍﻭ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ.‬ ‫7- ﻓﻜﺮ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﻥ ﺟﺪﻱ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﻜﺎﺭﺵ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ.‬ ‫8- ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﮔﻴﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻳﺪ.‬ ‫9- ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺸﻮﺭ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ.‬ ‫01- ﺍﻭ ﺻﻤﻴﻤﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺶ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ.‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ . ﻃﺒﻌﺎ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳـﻢ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﻳـﺎ ﺑـﻪ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺑﻄﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ :‬ ‫.‪Hellen is a fast typist‬‬ ‫.‪Hellen is fast‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻣﺜﻼ :‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫.‪Hellen types fast‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺪ‬ ‫.‪Hellen looks fast‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺖ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺑﻂ‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ‪ ly‬ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ :‬ ‫‪friendly‬‬ ‫ﺻﻤﻴﻤﻲ‬ ‫‪lovely‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﻲ‬ ‫‪deadly‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﮔﺒﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪kingly‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﻫﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫‪likely‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫‪worldy‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪motherly‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺩﺭﺍﻧﻪ‬ ‫‪fatherly‬‬ ‫ﭘﺪﺭﺍﻧﻪ‬ ‫‪sily‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﻤﻘﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫‪ugly‬‬ ‫ﺯﺷﺖ‬ ‫‪sisterly‬‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺮﺍﻧﻪ‬ ‫.‪Hellen is a friendly girl‬‬ ‫021‬
  • 14. ‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ : ﺍﮔﺮ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ‪ ly‬ﺍﺿـﺎﻓﻪ ﻛـﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻣـﺜﻼ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﮔﻔﺖ ‪ friendlyLY‬ﻧﺎﮔﺰﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.‬ ‫‪Fashion‬‬ ‫………… + ‪In a/ an‬‬ ‫‪Way‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ‬ ‫‪Manner‬‬ ‫ﻫﻠﻦ ﺻﻤﻴﻤﺎﻧﻪ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ.‬ ‫.‪Hellen speaks in a friendly manner‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻗﻴﺪ : ﻗﻴﺪ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺳﻪ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺗﺮ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺡ :‬ ‫1- ﻗﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ : ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﺜﻼ ﻫﻠﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻨﺪﻱ ﺳـﻮﺯﺍﻥ ﺗﺎﻳـﭗ ﻣـﻲ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﺪ .‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ.‬ ‫‪as‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪as‬‬ ‫‪not as/not so‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪as‬‬ ‫.‪Hellen types as slowly as Susan‬‬ ‫.‪Hellen doesn’t type so/as slowly as Susan‬‬ ‫2- ﻗﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺗﺮ : ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺪﺗﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺪ ﻣﺜﻼ :‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻫﻠﻦ ﻛﻨﺪﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﺯﺍﻥ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ.‬ ‫121‬
  • 15. ‫ﺑﻴﺎﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﺮﺗﺮ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﻭ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﻭ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺗﺮ ﺍﻳﻨﻄﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺴﺖ. ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ ly‬ﻣﻲ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ‪ more than‬ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ly‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻲ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺵ ‪ er‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ، ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ:‬ ‫.‪Hellen drives more slowly than Susan‬‬ ‫.‪Hellen drives faster than Susan‬‬ ‫3- ﻗﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺗﺮﻳﻦ ) ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ( : ﭼﻨﺪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻬﺘـﺮﻳﻦ ﻳـﺎ ﺑـﺪﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻣـﻲ‬ ‫ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺪ. ﻣﺜﻼ ﻫﻠﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻨﺪﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ.‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ "ﺗﺮﻳﻦ" ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﺯﻗﻴﺪ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﻴﺪ ‪ ly‬ﻣﻲ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ ﻗﺒﻠﺶ ‪ the most‬ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ly‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻲ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺵ ‪ the est‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ، ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ :‬ ‫.‪Hellen types the most slowly‬‬ ‫.‪Hellen types the fastest‬‬ ‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺫﻛﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ “ﺗﺮﻳﻦ” ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻧﺎﮔﺰﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻋـﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴـﻲ ﺑـﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ :‬ ‫} ﻭﺟﻪ / ﺻﻮﺭﺕ / ﺷﻜﻞ {‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ...........‬ ‫221‬
  • 16. ‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ : ‪intensifiers‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﻤﻴﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻻﻟﺖ ﺑﺮ ﻛﻤﻴﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ much, many‬ﮐﻪ ﻫﺮﺩﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﯽ ﺯﻳـﺎﺩ – ﺧﻴﻠـﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ.‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ + ‪much‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ + ‪many‬‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ much‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ many‬ﺍﺳـﻢ‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ.‬ ‫‪ much‬ﻭ ‪ many‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫?‪Has Hellen written many letters‬‬ ‫?‪Does Hellen drink much coffee‬‬ ‫.‪Helen has not written many letters‬‬ ‫.‪Hellen doesn’t drink much coffee‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺍﺯ ‪ a lot of‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷـﻮﺩ ﭼـﻪ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﻗﺎﺑـﻞ ﺷـﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﻭ ﭼـﻪ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﻏﻴـﺮ ﻗﺎﺑـﻞ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ، ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ :‬ ‫.‪Hellen has written a lot of letters‬‬ ‫.‪Hellen drinks a lot of coffee‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﺕ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ‪ too‬ﻳﺎ ‪ very‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ .‬ ‫‪Too‬‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩ – ﺧﻴﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺖ / ﻗﻴﺪ +‬ ‫‪Very‬‬ ‫321‬
  • 17. : ‫ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜﻼ‬very ‫ : ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‬too & very ‫ﻓﺮﻕ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ The park is very beautiful. The teacher speaks very fluently. : ‫ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﺎﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‬too ‫ﺍﻣﺎ‬ It is too cold today. That driver drives too slowly. :‫ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﻣﺜﻼ‬many ‫ ﻭ‬much ‫ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ‬too, very ‫ﹰ‬ There were too many cars in the street. Hellen drinks too much water in a day. She knows very many words. Thank you very much. .‫ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‬very , too ‫ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ، ﺑﺮﻋﻜﺲ‬enough ‫ﻛﻠﻤﻪ‬ ‫+ ﺻﻔﺖ / ﻗﻴﺪ‬ enough You are rich enough . He speaks fluently enough . : ‫ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺜﻼ‬enough ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ They spend enough money in a month . : ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﻤﻴﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﻢ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ‬ Little ‫ﻣﻔﺮﺩ – ﺍﺳﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ‬ ‫ﻛﻢ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﻙ‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻊ – ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ‬ Few 124
  • 18. ‫‪ : few & little‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﻤﻴﺘﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻧﻘﺪﺭ ﻧﺎﭼﻴﺰﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻭ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﺘﺮﻧﺪ.‬ ‫.‪I have little money in my pocket‬‬ ‫.‪He knows few words‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﭼﺸﻤﮕﻴﺮﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ few‬ﻭ ‪ little‬ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﻢ ﻗﺒـﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺣـﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳـﻒ )‪(a‬‬ ‫ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ.‬ ‫‪a little‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺮﺩ – ﺍﺳﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﻛﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻊ – ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ‬ ‫‪a few‬‬ ‫.‪I drink a little coffee after dinner‬‬ ‫.‪He has a few books in his book case‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﺓ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ.‬ ‫‪all‬‬ ‫‪plenty of – a great deal of – a lot of‬‬ ‫‪a lot of – a large number of – plenty of‬‬ ‫‪most‬‬ ‫‪most‬‬ ‫‪much‬‬ ‫‪many‬‬ ‫‪some‬‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ‬ ‫‪some‬‬ ‫-------‬ ‫‪several‬‬ ‫‪a little‬‬ ‫‪a few‬‬ ‫‪little‬‬ ‫‪few‬‬ ‫‪no‬‬ ‫521‬
  • 19. ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﺎﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺳـﻢ ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ. ﻣﺜﻼ:‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫.‪She Spends little money and I spend much‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺖ‬ ‫ﺿﻤﻴﺮ‬ ‫621‬
  • 20. ‫‪Such‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻏﻴﺮﻗﺎﺑـﻞ ﺷـﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﻣﻔـﺮﺩ ﺑـﺪﻳﻦ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ:‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ.‬ ‫.‪Helen hasn't said such words‬‬ ‫.‪Helen doesn't like such weather‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ Such a/an‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ:‬ ‫.‪Such a child can't stay quiet‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻪ ‪ Such‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺻﻔﺘﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ:‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺖ + ‪Such a/an‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ +‬ ‫.‪I haven’t seen such an interesting film so far‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ‪ Such‬ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ‪ so‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ:‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺖ + ‪So‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ + ‪+ a an‬‬ ‫.‪I haven't seen so interesting a film so far‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺭﺍ ‪ Very‬ﺷﺪﺕ ﺑﺨﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﺟـﺎﻱ ﺣـﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳـﻒ ﺑـﺪﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ.‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺖ + ‪a + Very‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ +‬ ‫721‬
  • 21. ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ :‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ.‬ ‫1ـ ﺍﻭ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻏﺬﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺷﻤﺰﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻧﺨﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ.‬ ‫2ـ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻡ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ، ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺳﺎﻟﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ.‬ ‫3ـ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻳﺒﺎﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﭘﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ.‬ ‫4ـ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ ﻟﻐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻨﺪ.‬ ‫5ـ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﭼﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﻮﻱ ﻗﻮﺭﻱ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ.‬ ‫6ـ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻧﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻫﺪﻳﺔ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺍﺭﺯﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺪﺭ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺑﺒﺮﻧﺪ.‬ ‫7ـ ﺍﻭ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺩﻛﺘﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺍﺳﺖ.‬ ‫8ـ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺎﺩﺓ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﺭﻛﺎﺏ ﺯﺩﻧﺪ.‬ ‫9ـ ﺍﻭ ﻋﺼﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻗﻮﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﺍﻍ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ.‬ ‫01ـ ﺍﻭ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺻﺒﺤﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﻲ ﻗﻬﻮﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺒﺤﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺵ ﺑﻨﻮﺷﺪ.‬ ‫821‬
  • 22. enough ‫ و‬too ‫ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ‬ .‫ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‬enough ‫ ﻳﺎ‬too ‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ‬ .‫1: ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‬ too + ‫ + ﺻﻔﺖ/ ﻗﻴﺪ‬to ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ‬ She is too young to work. She drives too slowly to arrive on time. ‫ + ﻗﻴﺪ/ ﺻﻔﺖ‬enough + to ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ‬ 1.She is rich enough to buy the house. 2.They work hard enough to earn a lot of money. .‫2: ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﻭﺷﺨﺺ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭ ﭼﻴﺰ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‬ too + ‫ + ﺻﻔﺖ/ ﻗﻴﺪ‬for ‫ + ﺷﺨﺺ‬to ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ‬ 1.The car is too expensive for me to buy. 2.You speak too fast for me to under stand. ‫ + ﺻﻔﺖ/ ﻗﻴﺪ‬enough + for ‫ + ﺷﺨﺺ‬to ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ‬ 1.The book is easy enough for us to read. 2.You sigh beautifully enough for them to enjoy. 129
  • 23. ‫»‪«Other‬‬ ‫»ﺩﻳﮕﺮ«‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ‪ other‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻧﺎﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺜﻼ:‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫.‪John has polished other shoes too‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ‪ another‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ. ﻣﺜﻼ:‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫.‪This child wants another toy‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ )ﭼﻪ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﭼﻪ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ‪ the other‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﺳـﻢ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻳـﺎ‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺜﻼ:‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫.‪I don't like this hat. I like the other hat‬‬ ‫.‪I don't like these shoes but I like the other shoes‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ﻫﻤﮕﻲ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ.‬ ‫+ ‪another‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻧﺎﻣﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻧﺎﻣﻌﻴﻦ +‪Other‬‬ ‫‪the other‬‬ ‫+‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪the other‬‬ ‫+‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ‪ one‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ones‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﺮﺩ.‬ ‫‪another one‬‬ ‫‪other ones‬‬ ‫‪the other one‬‬ ‫‪the other ones‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ another‬ﻭ ‪) the other‬ﻣﻔﺮﺩ( ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻛﺮﺩ.‬ ‫.‪I don't like this hat, I like the other. Hat‬‬ ‫.‪This child wants another hat‬‬ ‫031‬
  • 24. ‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ other‬ﻭ ‪) the other‬ﺟﻤﻊ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺑـﻪ ﻋﻨـﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻑ )‪ (S‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ.‬ ‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ـ ﺑﻘﻴﻪ → ‪others‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻭﻥ ﻳﻜﻲ ﻫﺎ( ﺁﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ → ‪The others‬‬ ‫.‪I don't like these shoes. I Like the others‬‬ ‫.‪John has polished others too‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺡ ﺯﻳﺮ ‪ other‬ﻭ ‪ another‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺻﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ.‬ ‫‪each other‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭﻛﺲ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮ - ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ‬ ‫‪one another‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﻛﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺡ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻼ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺣﻤﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻢ ﻭ ﺍﺣﻤﺪ ﻣﺮﺍ ﻣـﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳـﺪ ﺑﻬﺘـﺮ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﮔﻔﺘـﻪ ﺷـﻮﺩ: ﺍﺣﻤـﺪ ﻭ ﻣـﻦ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻴﻢ.‬ ‫.‪Ahmad and I know each other‬‬ ‫.‪People must help one another‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﻴﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻮ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻬـﺖ ﺭﺥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤـﺔ ‪ together‬ﺑـﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻨﻲ )ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ـ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ to gather‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺟﻤـﻊ ﺁﻭﺭﻱ ﻛـﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺷـﺘﺒﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻛﺮﺩ.‬ ‫.‪Helen and jane study together‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ‪ other‬ﻣﻌﻨﻲ »ﺩﻳﮕﺮ« ﻧﻤﻴﺪﻫﺪ.‬ ‫‪every other days = on alternate days‬‬ ‫ﻳﻜﺮﻭﺯ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪the other day = some days ago‬‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫‪other wise = or else‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻻـ ﻭﮔﺮﻧﻪ‬ ‫‪on the other hand = in other words‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬ ‫131‬
  • 25. ‫‪other than = except‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ‬ ‫‪one after another = one by one‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ :‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ.‬ ‫1ـ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺟﻠﺴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﻨﺪ.‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫2ـ ﻣﻦ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﻢ ﻳﻜﺮﻭﺯ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻼﺱ ﻣﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﻴﻢ.‬ ‫3ـ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻳﻢ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻓﺘﻨﺪ ﺧﺮﻳﺪ.‬ ‫4ـ ﺳﻪ ﺗﺎ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻴﺰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ـ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻢ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺎ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻢ.‬ ‫5ـ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺼﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺣﻴﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ، ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺳﻬﺎﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﻘﻴﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻼﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺰﺋﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ.‬ ‫6ـ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻠﻮﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ.‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫7ـ ﻣﺮﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻼﺱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻮﺩ.‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫8ـ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ.‬ ‫9ـ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺟﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﺓ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺍﺗﻮﺑﻮﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻧﺪ.‬ ‫01ـ ﻣﺎ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﺪﻣﺘﻜﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ.‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫231‬
  • 26. ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ :‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ.‬ ‫1ـ ﻣﺮﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺍﻻﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ.‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫2ـ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺸﻨﮕﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ.‬ ‫3ـ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺍﺭﺯﺩ.‬ ‫4ـ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﭽﻪ ﺷﻜﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺍﻳﻲ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻮﺩ.‬ ‫5ـ ﻣﻦ ﺁﺩﺭﺳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻱ ﮔﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ.‬ ‫6ـ ﻣﺮﺩﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﺁﻥ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻲ ﭘﺪﺭﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺪ.‬ ‫7ـ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺑﭽﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﻤﻴﺖ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮔﻔﺘﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺁﻣﺪ.‬ ‫8ـ ﻗﻠﻤﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺮﺍﻧﻲ ﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ.‬ ‫9ـ ﻣﻬﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺟﺸﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺰﺑﺎﻥ ﺗﺸﻜﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ.‬ ‫01ـ ﺁﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺣﻴﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺷﺎﮔﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﻤﻴﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ.‬ ‫11ـ ﭘﻴﺮﺍﻫﻨﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﻱ ﭼﻤﺪﺍﻥ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ.‬ ‫21ـ ﺍﻭ ﻛﻔﺸﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻡ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﻧﭙﻮﺷﻴﺪ.‬ ‫31ـ ﺗﻮﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻴﺒﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﮔﺮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺨﺮﻱ.‬ ‫41ـ ﭘﺴﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﻤﻴﺖ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﮔﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻮﺩ.‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫51ـ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺗﺎﻗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮﺩﻱ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻢ.‬ ‫331‬
  • 27. ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ :‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ.‬ ‫1ـ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ.‬ ‫?‪Isn’t this the largest building in this area‬‬ ‫2ـ ﺍﻭ ﺯﻳﺒﺎﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﮔﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻏﭽﻪ ﺭﺍ ﭼﻴﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ.‬ ‫.‪He had picked the most beautiful flower from this garden‬‬ ‫3ـ ﻫﻠﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺮﺵ ﺑﺎﻫﻮﺵ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ.‬ ‫.‪Helen isn't so/as intelligent as her sister‬‬ ‫4ـ ﺍﻭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺮﺍﻧﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻫﺪﻳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺪﺭﺵ ﺑﺒﺮﺩ.‬ ‫.‪He is supposed to take the most expensive present for his father‬‬ ‫5ـ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﻤﻴﺖ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ.‬ ‫.‪Mr. Smith is the fastest typist in this office‬‬ ‫6ـ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺎ ﮔﺮﺍﻧﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﻱ.‬ ‫.‪Our house is more expensive than the house that you have bought‬‬ ‫7ـ ﺍﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ.‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫.‪He used to live in the smallest house in this street‬‬ ‫8ـ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻢ ﺩﺭﺍﺯﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺸﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ 42 ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ.‬ ‫.‪I could drive the longest road in this country for 24 hours‬‬ ‫9ـ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﻛﻔﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻮ ﺍﺭﺯﺍﻧﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.‬ ‫431‬
  • 28. I think, your shoes are cheaper than mine .‫01ـ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻳﺒﺎﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻫﺪﻳﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﻡ‬ This is the most interesting present that I have bought. 135
  • 29. ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ‪Relative Pronouns‬‬ ‫ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻼ ﮔﻔﺘﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ، ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻠﻬـﺎﻱ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫‪ Link‬ﻳﺎ ﺭﺑﻂ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ. ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ، ﺷﻜﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻮﻥ ﭼﻨﺎﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ ﻭﺻـﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ + )ﻛﻪ( ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ + ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﭘﺲ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ؛ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﺖ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ. ﺧﺎﺻـﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣـﻲ ﻛﻨـﺪ.‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻴﻢ ﺑﻬﺮ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﻫﻤﺔ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ »ﻛﻪ« ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ )ﻙ ـ ﻩ( ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴـﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﺸﺎﻥ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺡ.‬ ‫1ـ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪ who‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.‬ ‫.‪The man‬‬ ‫.‪The man works here‬‬ ‫.‪…the man who works here‬‬ ‫2ـ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪ whom‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.‬ ‫‪The man‬‬ ‫.‪I know the man‬‬ ‫.‪…the man whom I know‬‬ ‫3ـ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪ which‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.‬ ‫‪The bus‬‬ ‫.‪The bus stops here everyday‬‬ ‫.‪…the bus which stops here everyday‬‬ ‫4ـ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪ which‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.‬ ‫‪The book‬‬ ‫.‪I study the book‬‬ ‫.‪…the book which I study‬‬ ‫5ـ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ‪ where‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.‬ ‫.‪The house‬‬ ‫.‪they live in it‬‬ ‫.) ‪the house where they live ( in‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻭﻗﺘﻴﻜﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪ where‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ.‬ ‫631‬
  • 30. ‫6ـ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ‪ when‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.‬ ‫.‪The year‬‬ ‫.‪I was born in the year‬‬ ‫.‪The year when I was born‬‬ ‫7ـ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺁﻥ ‪ whose‬ﺍﺳﺖ.‬ ‫‪The man‬‬ ‫.‪his wife works with me‬‬ ‫.‪…The man whose wife works with me‬‬ ‫‪…The dog whose name was Top‬‬ ‫ﻳﺎ‬ ‫.‪the dog the name of which was top of‬‬ ‫‪ of which‬ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛـﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ‪ whose‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺠـﺎﻱ ‪ whose‬ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ whose‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ‪ whose‬ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ‪ whose‬ﺍﺯ ‪ of which‬ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ.‬ ‫…‪The room whose door‬‬ ‫…‪The room the door of which‬‬ ‫8ـ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺁﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ‪ whose‬ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.‬ ‫9ـ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ‪ which‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ‪ The thing‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺠـﺎﻱ ﺗﺮﻛﻴـﺐ ‪ The thing which‬ﺍﺯ‬ ‫‪ what‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ. ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ:‬ ‫.‪The thing which you need is fresh air‬‬ ‫.‪What you need is fresh air‬‬ ‫01ـ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻭ ﻋﻠﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ‪ why‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.‬ ‫.‪The reason‬‬ ‫.‪I study English for that reason‬‬ ‫.‪The reason why I study English is that I want to go abroad‬‬ ‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ ﻣﻬﻢ: ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ‪ The reason why‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤـﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﺑﻂ ‪ That‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﻪ ‪. because‬‬ ‫731‬
  • 31. ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﺳﻢ، ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻـﻮﻟﻲ )‪ ،(who‬ﻫﻤـﺔ ﺿـﻤﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﻜـﺎﺭ ﻣـﻲ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ They‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ‪ Those‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺜﻼ:‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫.‪I who work hard‬‬ ‫‪we who work hard‬‬ ‫.‪You who work hard‬‬ ‫‪you who work hard‬‬ ‫.‪It who works hard‬‬ ‫.‪She who works hard‬‬ ‫.‪Those who work hard‬‬ ‫.‪He who works hard‬‬ ‫1. ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻨﻲ ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ »ﻛﻪ« ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ، 3 ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ‪ whom ، who‬ﻭ ‪) which‬ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻟﻲ( ﻗﺎﺑـﻞ ﺟـﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﺷـﺪﻥ ﺑـﺎ ‪that‬‬ ‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ:‬ ‫.‪The man who works here is my uncle‬‬ ‫‪that‬‬ ‫.‪The man whom you saw yesterday wants you‬‬ ‫‪that‬‬ ‫.‪The house which is on the corner is mine‬‬ ‫‪that‬‬ ‫.‪The house which you bought is too expensive‬‬ ‫‪that‬‬ ‫2. ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺬﻑ »ﻛﻪ« ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ‪ whom‬ﻭ ‪) which‬ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻟﻲ( ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬ ‫.‪The man which you saw yesterday wants you‬‬ ‫.‪The house which you bought is too expensive‬‬ ‫3. ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ.‬ ‫1ـ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ )‪ (necessary‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ )‪ (defining‬ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ.‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺷﺎﻥ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﻣﺜﻼ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﺜﻞ:‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫.‪a writer is a person‬‬ ‫831‬
  • 32. ‫ﺷﻨﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻪ ‪ Person‬ﺑﻔﻬﻤﺪ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻫﺮ ﺟﻤﻠـﺔ ﻭﺻـﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻣﺜﻼ:‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫.‪a writer is a person who writes novel‬‬ ‫2ـ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ )‪ (unnecessary‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ‪ none defining‬ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ.‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻼﺗﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺷﺎﻥ ﺻﺪﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣـﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳـﻢ ﺑﻜـﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺜﻼ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﺜﻞ:‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫.‪Hafez is a great poet‬‬ ‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻫﺮ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺣـﺎﻓﻆ ﺑﻴـﺎﻥ ﺷـﻮﺩ ﺻﺪﺩﺭﺻـﺪ ﺿـﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ ﻭ ﺑـﻪ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫)‪ (unnecessary‬ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ. ﻣﺜﻼ:‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫.‪Hafez who lives in Shiraz, is a great poet‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ )‪ (unnecessary‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﻣﺎ )،( ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧـﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺳـﻢ ﻗﺒﻠﺸـﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳـﺎﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﺳﺖ.‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﺔ ﻣﻬﻢ: ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺟـﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻨﻲ ﻭ ﺣـﺬﻑ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ ﻫـﺎﻱ ‪ none defining‬ﺑﻜـﺎﺭ ﻧﻤـﻲ ﺭﻭﻧـﺪ ﻭﻟـﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ ﻫـﺎﻱ‬ ‫‪ defining‬ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ.‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ :‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ.‬ ‫1ـ ﻣﺮﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻮﺩ.‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫931‬
  • 33. ‫2ـ ﺁﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺯﻭﺩ ﺑﻴﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻣﻮﻓﻖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ.‬ ‫3ـ ﻣﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻮﻝ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺟﻴﺐ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻡ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺩ ﻓﻘﻴﺮ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻛﻨﻢ.‬ ‫4ـ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺻﻒ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻧﺎﻥ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺖ.‬ ‫5ـ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻧﺰﺩﻡ ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﺎ ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﺑﻮﺩ.‬ ‫6ـ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺧﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ، ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﻥ ﺑﻮﺩ.‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫7ـ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺩﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺵ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻲ ﻧﺪﻳﺪﻡ.‬ ‫8ـ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﺗﻮ ﺁﻥ ﺳﻴﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻱ. ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭ.‬ ‫9ـ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﺠﺰ ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﺩ.‬ ‫01ـ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺨﺮﺩ ﮔﺮﺍﻧﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ.‬ ‫041‬
  • 34. ‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺣﺪﺳﻲ ﻭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺑﺮ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟـﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳـﺮ ﻧﺸـﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ.‬ ‫‪to do‬‬ ‫‪ does-did‬ـ‬ ‫‪to have‬‬ ‫‪ has-had‬ـ‬ ‫‪to be‬‬ ‫‪ am-is-are-was-were‬ـ‬ ‫‪to need‬‬ ‫ـ ـ‬ ‫‪can‬‬ ‫‪ Could‬ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻦ‬ ‫‪may‬‬ ‫‪ Might‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪must‬‬ ‫ـ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪shall‬‬ ‫‪ Should‬ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪will‬‬ ‫‪ Would‬ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ‬ ‫ـ‬ ‫‪ used to‬ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ـ‬ ‫‪ ought to‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬ ‫ـ‬ ‫‪ to be supposed to‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ـ‬ ‫‪ had better‬ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ‬ ‫ـ‬ ‫‪ would rather‬ـ‬ ‫ـ‬ ‫‪ have to‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ )‪ (can, may, shall, will, must‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻳﺸﺔ ﻣﺼﺪﺭﻱ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻣﺪﺍﻝ ﮔﻮﻳﻨـﺪ‬ ‫)‪.(modal‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ. ﻛﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ:‬ ‫‪ would-should-might-could‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﻝ ﻭﻣﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﺎ ﺳـﻪ ﻧـﻮﻉ ﻣﺼـﺪﺭ ﺳـﺎﺩﻩ ،‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﻢ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺣﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ.‬ ‫141‬
  • 35. ‫1ـ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ: ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﻝ ﻭ ﻣﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺣﺎﺻـﻠﻪ ﺯﻣـﺎﻥ ﺣـﺎﻝ ﻭ ﻳـﺎ‬ ‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ. )ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ(‬ ‫.‪Bob can come now. → Bob can come tomorrow‬‬ ‫.‪Bob could come now. → Bob could come tomorrow‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺸﺘﻘﻬﺎ، ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.‬ ‫.‪Bob could come yesterday‬‬ ‫.‪I knew that Bob could come‬‬ ‫2ـ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ:‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ‪ Should‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺣﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻝ ـ ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﻣﺜﻼ:‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫.‪Helen should be resting‬‬ ‫)ﻫﻠﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﺏ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭﻟﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ(‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ، ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﺍﮔـﺮ ﻇـﺎﻫﺮ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ، ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜﻼ:‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫.‪Hellen Shouldn’t be resting‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ‪ may‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺣﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ.‬ ‫.‪It may be raining‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺷﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺣﺪﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺯﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.‬ ‫3ـ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ: ﺑﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ‪ can , must , may‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺣﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﺣﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜﻼ:‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻫﻠﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. .‪Hellen must have seen the film‬‬ ‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﺣﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻭ ﻗﺮﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺣﺪﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺯﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷـﺘﻪ ﺭﺥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻼ ﺍﺯﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻫﻠﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺣﺪﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺯﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫241‬
  • 36. ‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻗﺘـﻲ ‪ might-ought to-should-could-would‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﻴـﺐ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ ﺟﻤﻠـﺔ ﺣﺎﺻـﻠﻪ ﮔﺬﺷـﺘﺔ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ.‬ ‫‪could ‬‬ ‫‪should ‬‬‫‪‬‬ ‫)ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ( ‪would  + have P.P‬‬ ‫‪might ‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ought to ‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ:‬ ‫.‪I should have gone there‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻲﺭﻓﺘﻢ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ )ﻛﻪ ﻧﺮﻓﺘﻢ(.‬ ‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ‪ not‬ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑـﺎﻻ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ‪ not‬ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ:‬ ‫.‪I shouldn’t have gone there‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻲﺭﻓﺘﻢ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ )ﻭﻟﻲ ﺭﻓﺘﻢ(.‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ :‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ.‬ ‫1ـ ﭘﺪﺭﻡ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﭘﻴﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ. ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﻭﺧﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.‬ ‫2ـ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ. ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﻱ ﻛﻤﺪ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻤﺸﺎﻥ.‬ ‫3ـ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﻋﻤﻮﻳﻢ ﺟﺎ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻢ. ﭼﻮﻥ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺟﻴﺒﻢ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ.‬ ‫341‬
  • 37. ‫4ـ ﺗﻮ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﻠﻮﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺗﻮﻫﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻱ.‬ ‫5ـ ﭘﺪﺭﻡ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻓﺖ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺩﻛﺘﺮ )ﭼﻮﻥ ﭼﺸﻤﻬﺎﻳﺶ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ(.‬ ‫6ـ ﺗﻮ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﻧﺴﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺷﻮﻱ ﻧﻤﻴﺪﻭﻧﻢ ﭼﺮﺍ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻱ.‬ ‫7ـ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻑ ﻛﻨﺪ. ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻲ.‬ ‫8ـ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﺪﺭﻡ ﺯﻭﺩﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ.‬ ‫9ـ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺤﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻔﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.‬ ‫01ـ ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.‬ ‫441‬
  • 38. ‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪﺓ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻻﻟﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ.‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ: ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣـﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺘـﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺯﻣـﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ.‬ ‫ﺗﺎ + ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ + ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ← ﺁﻳﻨﺪﺓ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ: ﺗﺎ ﺳﺎﻝ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺑﻴﺮﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺭﻍ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺼﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻢ.‬ ‫.‪I will have graduated from high school by next year‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ: ﺭﺿﺎ ﺗﺎ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ 5 ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺘﻪ ﺧﻮﻧﻪ.‬ ‫.‪Reza will have returned home by five o’clock‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ: ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.‬ ‫‪Subject + will have + Past Participle‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ:‬ ‫1ـ ﺗﺎ + ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ← )‪ (By tomorrow‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ + ‪By‬‬ ‫‪in ‬‬ ‫‪ two weeks‬‬ ‫2ـ ﺗﺎ + ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ←‬ ‫‪within ‬‬ ‫3ـ ﺗﺎ + ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ← ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺎ + ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ← ﺁﻳﻨﺪﺓ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫4ـ‬ ‫‪by the time‬‬ ‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫‪before‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ +‬ ‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫‪as soon as‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ +‬ ‫‪when‬‬ ‫541‬
  • 39. ‫‪Conditionals‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﻜﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻁ )‪ (if clause‬ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺘﻴﺠـﻪ‬ ‫ﻳﺎ ﺟﺰﺍﺀ )‪ (main clause‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ:‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺷﺮﻁ ، ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻁ + ‪if‬‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻮﺷﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻛﺎﻣـﺎ )ﻭ(‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻂ ﺩﻭ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ.‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻁ + ‪ + if‬ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﺰﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻣﺎ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ.‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺳﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ. ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ـ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻫﺴـﺘﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺡ:‬ ‫1ـ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻭﻝ: ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ.‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻁ‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﺰﺍﺀ‬ ‫+ ‪if‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫.‪If Helen has money, she can buy the car‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻠﻦ ﭘﻮﻟﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. ﺍﻭ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺭﻭ ﺑﺨﺮﺩ.‬ ‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ )‪ (Possible‬ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ.‬ ‫641‬
  • 40. ‫2ـ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻭﻡ: ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ.‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻁ‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﺰﺍﺀ‬ ‫+ ‪if‬‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ + ﻣﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫.‪If Helen had money now, she could buy the car‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻠﻦ ﺍﻻﻥ ﭘﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﻧﺴﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺨﺮﺩ.‬ ‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻧﻤـﻲ ﻛﻨـﺪ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻧـﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻃﻲ )‪ (imaginary‬ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ.‬ ‫3ـ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﻮﻡ: ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ.‬ ‫+ ‪if‬‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻁ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﺰﺍﺀ‬ ‫‪have + P.P‬‬ ‫‪ + have + P.P‬ﻣﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫.‪If Hellen had had money, she could have bought the book yesterday‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻠﻦ ﺩﻳﺮﻭﺯ ﭘﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺨﺮﺩ.‬ ‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪﻩ، ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻧﻴﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧـﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻳﺎ )‪ (impossible‬ﻳﺎ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ.‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻭ ﺳﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻭ ﺳﻮﻡ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜﻼ:‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫1ـ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﭘﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﻡ.‬ ‫.‪If I had money today, I would buy this book‬‬ ‫2ـ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻳﺮﻭﺯ ﭘﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﻡ.‬ ‫.‪If I had money yesterday , I would have bought this car‬‬ ‫741‬